29
SAP CRM: CR100, TCRM10, TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation 1 © 2010 by Itay Abuhav [email protected]. All Rights Reserved 31.08.10 Hello Everyone This document is a helpful tool for studying for the SAP CRM certification test. The required documentations for the test are the next SAP documentations: http://www.sap.com/germany/services/education/schulungskatalog/sap- crm/certificationtest.epx?context=[[C_TCRM20_70|]]| The principle of this document is very simple; for each page on the SAP study documentation I wrote appropriate questions. The answers are on the second attached document: SAP CRM100-TCRM10-TCRM20 ANSWERS Remarks: 1. I cannot assure that the questions and answers are correct. I take no responsibility for the information on this document. The student is responsible alone. I am not an authority regarding the SAP CRM 7.0. 2. Some of the questions would appear vague and unclear. Try to relate them to the topic on the documentation. 3. I apologize in advance for any misspells or grammatical mistakes. I am not a native English speaker. Index: BTr Business Transaction Con. Ty. Condition Type TrTy Transaction Type BO Business Object It. Cat. Item Category NB Navigation Bar SO System Object BR Business Role TDP Test Determination procedure OVP Over View Page PP Pricing Procedure DLG Direct Link Group PDP Partner Determination Procedure WCLL Work Center Logical Link AS Access Sequence MW Middleware WC Web Client UI User Interface MD Master Data DC Distribution Channel S2P B2P Sold to party Bill to party and etc. DIV Division InsB Installment Base Good Luck

Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

Embed Size (px)

DESCRIPTION

.

Citation preview

Page 1: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

1 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

310810

Hello Everyone

This document is a helpful tool for studying for the SAP CRM certification test The

required documentations for the test are the next SAP documentations

httpwwwsapcomgermanyserviceseducationschulungskatalogsap-

crmcertificationtestepxcontext=[[C_TCRM20_70|]]|

The principle of this document is very simple for each page on the SAP study

documentation I wrote appropriate questions The answers are on the second

attached document SAP CRM100-TCRM10-TCRM20 ANSWERS

Remarks

1 I cannot assure that the questions and answers are correct I take no

responsibility for the information on this document The student is responsible

alone I am not an authority regarding the SAP CRM 70

2 Some of the questions would appear vague and unclear Try to relate them to

the topic on the documentation

3 I apologize in advance for any misspells or grammatical mistakes I am not a

native English speaker

Index

BTr Business Transaction Con Ty Condition Type

TrTy Transaction Type BO Business Object

It Cat Item Category NB Navigation Bar

SO System Object BR Business Role

TDP Test Determination procedure OVP Over View Page

PP Pricing Procedure DLG Direct Link Group

PDP Partner Determination Procedure

WCLL Work Center Logical Link

AS Access Sequence MW Middleware

WC Web Client UI User Interface

MD Master Data DC Distribution Channel

S2P

B2P

Sold to party

Bill to party and etc

DIV Division

InsB Installment Base

Good Luck

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

2 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Itay Abuhav

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

1 What are the key Functions in SAP CRM

2 What are the contact channels on SAP CRM

11

3 In which ways can the different SAP CRM applications be integrated in the

organization (5)

12

4 Which middleware components are to be installed in order to realize the

connection between the SAP CRM server and the ERP server (two

components)

13

5 Which interface is common and recommended for the CRM end users 17

6 What is Customization in a SAP system

7 What characterizes the Customization in SAP system (2)

8 What options have we in order to optimize customers requirements

specification on the SAP system

18

9 What is Transaction SPRO 21

10 Where do you change the design view setting (like layouts and font) on the

Web Client

22

11 What are the relevant terms for Business Partners (3)

12 How are the numbers of the entities determined

33

13 What is the main objective of a business partner

14 What is the difference between CRM Business partner model and other

ERP systems

15 What serves the business partner relationship definitions (roles) of a

business partner

34

16 What are the business partner categories

17 What is a business partner group

18 Who can be included as a business partner on the system

19 What is the meaning of an organization definition for a business partner

35

20 What is the meaning of business partner role

21 How many roles could be assigned to one business partner

36

22 What is the Objective of the BP relationship

23 What are the Attributes of a Relationship

37

24 What types of business partner relationships the system maintains

25 What is the purpose of a Relationship category

38

26 What is the BAS What are the objectives of BAS 39

27 To whom we define the marketing attributes

28 What is the Objective of the marketing attributes

29 What is the use of the marketing attributes (2)

40

30 What is the account classification What includes the account

classification

31 What is the use of account classification

32 How do you classify an account

41

33 To Which System object we assign the Lifecycle 43

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

3 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

34 What is the use of the Lifecycle Management

35 What is the relation between the Account lifecycle and the role

36 What is the relation between the Account lifecycle and the BP

37 How do you implement the lifecycle in the system transactions 44

38 What does the lifecycle determines when assigned to an entity

39 What is the relation between lifecycle and exclusion group

45

40 What is the use of mini templates

41 To which data are the mini templates assigned

42 What is the use of the Buying Center

43 To which System entity the Buying center is assigned

47

44 What are the Hierarchy nodes

45 What is the relation between a node from the ERP system and one form the

CRM

48

46 What are the hierarchy nodes Categories

47 What is the difference between them

48 What is the mobility policy in a node

49

49 Which methods there are for creating or updating BP master data in the

system (6)

50

50 What is the main difference between CRM and SAP ERP system when

handling a BP

51 What other differences are mentioned (4)

51

52 What is the main different between the CRM and the ERP when managing

BP

53 What is the basis for the difference

52

54 What is the purpose and advantages of the Easy Enhancement

Workbench

54

55 What are the Objectives of the Organizational Management

56 What is the relation between the SAP ERP and the CRM on the

organizational model

57 How the organizational Determination contributes the processes

80

58 What the three uses of the Organizational Management 81

59 What is the principle of Organizational Management 82

60 What are the suggested attributes of the CRM Organizational Model (5) 83

61 Which are the types of organizational Objects and what is the difference

between them

62 What are the attributes of each Organizational Object

84

63 What is the use of the General Attributes

64 What is the relation between the Org Unit and the position regarding the

Attributes

85

65 What are the Sales Functions on the organizational structure and their

responsibilities

66 Which one is the mandatory Function

67 What is the main difference between the various org objects

86

68 What are the service Functions on the organizational structure and their 87

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

4 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

responsibilities

69 Which one is the mandatory Function

70 What is the main difference between the various org objects

71 What is the Marketing Functions on the organizational structure

72 What functions the Marketing organization allows us

73 What is its significance in compare with Sales and Services

88

74 What are the two methods to determine Organizational data to a

transaction

91

75 How does the system locate data and from where for realizing a

Transaction

76 Which two Kinds of rules guide the system when determining the data for

Transactions

77 Why is it required to determine certain rules to certain transactions

92

78 What is the system process flow of the Organizational data determination

79 What is the sequence of configuration flow of the Organizational data

determination

95

80 What are the product types in the CRM system (6)

81 What kinds of product data can be transferred from the ERP to the CRM

82 What is the reason that the data cannot be changed

111 TCRM10

ndash 481

83 What option is there to changes unchangeable product data on the CRM

system that sourced from the ERP

84 What is the sequence of creating a product on the ERP and transferring it to

the CRM and which system middle is required

113 TCRM10

- 482

85 What is the objective of the relationship

86 What are Accessories Customers products Vendors products Service

Products Spare part product Component products Warranties

87 Which system condition should be maintained in order to set the relationship

type

114 TCRM10

- 482

88 What are the Objectives of a Competitor Product

89 What is the use of the competitor product

90 What kind of Product type is a Competitor Product

91 Which transaction can use the competitor product

115 TCRM10

-484

92 What is the hierarchy of product definition

93 What is the definition and purpose of a Set Type

94 What are the Set Type elements

95 Which kind of set types has the product master and what each one

contains

116 TCRM10

- 490

96 What is the basic Set Type definition and Hierarchies for a product on the

CRM System

97 What is the sequence of transferring product from the ERP to the CRM

98 What is the requirement for Material product that was transferred from the

ERP

99 What is the significance of assigning a product to the product type

100 What is the difference between the hierarchy assignment to the different

product types in the CRM system And why

117

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

5 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

101 What is the different type of service products

102 What is the Warranty product and which kind of warranty product there

are

118 TCRM10

- 492

103 What is the objective on an Attribute

104 What are the parameters that define Attribute

105 What are the Objective of Set types

106 Which options are there for Set types uses

107 What is the set type restriction

108 Which Object is assigned to another

109 What are the mini templates

119 TCRM10

- 493

110 What enables the Product Category

111 What is the Objective of Product Category

112 Describe the logic behind the structure of Hierarchies and Product

Category and set type What is the role of the set type

120 TCRM10

ndash 493

113 What are the various elements necessary to enhance a Product 121 TCRM10

ndash 493

114 What is an Adapter Object

115 What is the two required downloads when replicating data from the ERP

to the CRM

122 TCRM10

- 493

116 What are the Objectives (3) of a Transaction

117 What are the options between various transactions (3)

151 TCRM20

-1 ndash 17

118 What are the two different areas on a transaction and what is the

difference between them

119 What is the use of a BTr

120 What is the use of the BTr Type

121 What is the additional level that a sales BTr has Which check is

required to operate this level

152 TCRM20

-1 - 18

122 What is determined when a TrTy is set for a BTr What are the three

elements

123 Name a few of the Transactions Characteristics

124 What is the restriction when working with a BTr regarding follow ups

125 What is the objective of a TrTy

126 What are the Blocking Reasons Where is it defined

127 What is the use of the permission channels

153 TCRM20

ndash 19 - 51

128 What triggers the Item Category

129 What are the attributes determined by the Item Category

130 Which data and profiles are fixed on an Item Category and what

resembles these data For which type of information are they divided

131 Which data is then determined and what resembles these data

154 TCRM20

ndash 20-54

132 What is the Item Category Group Where is it defined

133 What is the sequence of the item category determination

134 What is the condition regarding the item category determination when

replicating information from the ERP to the CRM Why

155 TCRM20

- 54

135 How the system does determine the Item Category

136 What are the options for Item category determination aside from the

156 TCRM20

- 55

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

6 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

default ones

137 What are the two options to maintain Preceding and subsequent

Documents

138 What is necessary in order to carry them out

139 What is the restriction when performing a copy control for a Transaction

157 TCRM20

- 93

140 What is the objective Transaction History

141 What is the difference between different kinds of transactions

142 What does the Transaction History allow

143 What triggers the transaction History

158 TCRM20

ndash 95

144 What is the sequence of the copy control

145 In Which cases the Copy control is mandatory

146 What is the case with Service when performing copy control

159 TCRM20

- 97

147 What is linking a document subsequently

148 What is copied and what is not copied when linking a document

subsequently

149 What is updated when the subsequent link was done

150 Which profile is required in order to allow a subsequent link

160 TCRM20

- 98

151 What are the Basic Functions in a BTr and what is the objective and use

of each (profiles)

161 TCRM20

- 98

152 What are the notes Which kinds of notes the system offers

153 What are the notes features

154 To which SO can these notes be maintained

162 TCRM20

- 99

155 How looks the Hierarchy of the TDP

156 What is determined for the Text under the TDP

157 To which SO assign one the TDP

163 TCRM20

- 100

158 What is the Objective of the Date Management

159 In which cases the Date Management is usable

160 For which BTr the date management is used

161 What are the characteristics of the Date Management

162 According to which System Object the Date Management rule is

determined

164 TCRM20

- 102

163 What are Date Types

164 What are durations

165 What are the date rules

165 TCRM20

- 103

166 What is the objective of the status management and what is the use

167 What Kind of System Statuses are managed on the System

168 What are the User Status restriction regarding a BTr

169 What are the User Status options regarding a User

166 TCRM20

- 104

170 Which system Objects determine the status Profile

171 What is necessary to define and activate a status profile on the system

172 What is a status number

173 What is determined when a status profile is called Which another

system rule is then required

167 TCRM20

- 105

174 What is the Objective Incompleteness Check

175 What is the use of the Incompleteness Check

168 TCRM20

- 107

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

7 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

176 What is the hierarchy of the Incompleteness Process To which system

object is it assigned

177 What is the objective of the Change History What are the three

parameters

178 Where is the Change History defined

170 TCRM20

- 130

179 What is the Objective of the activity

180 What kinds of Activities are there in the System

181 What characterizes an Activity What is the difference from other BTr

(3)

182 What are the two leading Business Transactions Categories for activities

that are defined in the System What is the difference between them

183 What is the relation between activities and other BTr

217 TCRM20

- 131

184 What is the Business Activity Structure And what is included

185 What is the relation between the activity Category and the Transaction

Type

218

186 What is included under the default data on the activity TrTy

187 What is required in order to add product to activities

219 TCRM20

- 136

188 What are the options for Follow-up Activities on the System What is the

difference between them

220 TCRM20

- 137

189 What are the characteristics of a questionnaire 221 TCRM20

- 137

190 What is the main purpose of the Activity Journal

191 What is the use of the Journal Activity

192 What is required in order to track Products

193 What is the relation with other TrTy

222 TCRM20

- 140

194 What is the objective of the connection between the CRM System and

the groupware

195 What is the use of the groupware application

196 What is required when defining the groupware

197 What are the system requirements for operating the groupware

223 TCRM20

- 142

198 What are the Objects that could be transferred between the CRM and a

Groupware System

199 Which Technology Elements are used to execute this option What

components are required

224 TCRM20

- 144

200 What is the activity analysis

201 What is necessary in order to be able to create reports

225

202 What is the objective of the PP

203 What is the use of the PP (5)

204 What are the most important sources of information are in the PP

243 TCRM20

- 168

205 What triggers the PP

206 What is the process sequence of the PP

244 TCRM20

- 169

207 What are the four principles of the PP (for data entering for document

for process)

245 TCRM20

- 171

208 What is the Partner Function Category 246 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

8 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

209 What is the Partner Function

210 What is the Partner Determination Procedure

211 What is the Access Sequence

- 176

212 What is the customizing restriction regarding the assignment of a Partner

Function What are the Hierarchy and Relation between the Partner

Function Category and the Partner Function

213 What is the Relationship Category What is the Relation between the

Partner Function Category and the Relationship Category What is the

connection to the Access sequence

214 What is the use of the Lock

215 What is the Undefined Partner

247 TCRM20

- 178

216 What is the Objective of the PDP

217 What is the use of the PDP

218 Which main data sources are used by the PDP

219 What type of data the PDP brings

220 Which data is determined in the PDP (4)

221 Which PDP parameters are defined (2)

222 To what we assign the Partner Determination Procedure

248 TCRM20

- 179

223 What is the Objective of the Access Sequence

224 What is the Use of the Access Sequence For which objects is it

referring

225 What is the option when no Access Sequence is determined

249 TCRM20

- 180

226 What is the order of events of data determination when processing a

process in the system

227 What are the parameters checked by the AS

228 Which customizing condition regarding the system process is required in

order to relate a PDP to a TrTy

229 What happens when a BP is determined on the PDP but no AS is

assigned to him

250 TCRM20

- 181

230 What is the purpose of actions on the System

231 What is the use of actions on the System

232 What is the terminology for the actions processing

273 TCRM20

- 207

233 What is the sequence of events for executing an action

234 To which System Element the Action Profile is assigned

235 What is the purpose of an Action Profile

236 Which Parameters are determined in the Action Profile regarding the

execution of actions

274 TCRM20

- 208

237 What is the Start Condition and the Schedule Condition on the System

and what is the relation between them

238 For which SO are the conditions assigned

239 What are the two mode of defining them

275 TCRM20

- 209

240 What is the purpose of the Processing Time

241 What kind of Processing Time the System allows and what is the

difference between them (3) Give examples for each

242 To which System Object do we assign the Processing Time

276 TCRM20

- 210

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

9 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

243 Where can we view the assigned actions What parameters are shown

244 What are the Processing types in the System and what is the purpose of

each one

277 TCRM20

- 211

245 What is the Hierarchy of the Action Profile definition

246 What are the parameters of the action profile and which characters has

each

247 What is the relation between a Transaction type and the Action Profile

278 TCRM20

- 212

248 What is the sequence of event when for an action profile to go in active 279 TCRM20

- 213

249 What is a Smart Form How does it work

250 Which kind of examples of activities documentation could be designed on

the SAP Smart Form

281 TCRM20

- 215

251 What is the purpose of the Action Monitor

252 Where is it originated

253 What is the use of the action monitor

254 What is the relation between the action monitor and the selection report

282 TCRM20

- 215

255 What is the responsible component for the Pricing in the CRM System

On which technology is it based

256 Which Pricing elements are included in the IPC From where comes the

relevant data (4 ndash sales product tax)

257 What is the use of the PP

258 On which SAP applications can the IPC be used What are the pricing

possibilities with it

259 What are the limitations of transferring pricing data from the ERP to the

CRM And why httphelpsapcomerp2005_ehp_04helpdataEN352cd77bd7705394e10000009b387c12framesethtm

305 TCRM20

- 243

260 What are the two Implementation Scenarios for the IPC and what is the

difference between them

306 TCRM20

- 244

261 What is the logic structure of the PP

262 On which parameters does the PP influence the Condition types (5 ndash the

use calculation )

307 TCRM20

- 245

263 Which System Objects and Data sources determine the Pricing

Procedure (5)

308 TCRM20

- 246

264 What is the Objective of the Con Ty On which system Object is it

operative

265 What are the characteristics of the Cond Ty

309 TCRM20

- 248

266 What is the objective of the Sequence Access

267 What is the Hierarchy between the AS and the Con Ty

268 Where is it used on the System What is the sequence of events when a

Con Is operated

269 What is a condition record

310 TCRM20

- 249

270 What is the Condition Tables

271 How does the condition Table is activated

272 What is the main restriction regarding the condition table

311 TCRM20

- 250

273 What is the Sequence of events during the Pricing Procedure 312 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

10 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

274 Which Condition techniques are already determined in the System - 251

275 What is the role of the Condition Records on the Pricing Procedure

276 What is the sequence of events of the condition record in the process of

pricing How does a Condition Record calculate the result What other

possibilities are

277 What is the Value scale

313 TCRM20

- 255

278 To which System Object could Conditions be maintained 314 TCRM20

- 256

279 What is included under the Condition Group 315

280 What is the Price Analysis

281 What is the use

282 When is it possible to use it

316 TCRM20

- 257

283 Which different function and uses (other than the regular pricing used on

a BTr) has the Pricing Process

284 What are the restrictions of pricing procedures on CRM

317 TCRM20

- 258

285 What are the different data sources for the Tax Determination

286 How is the Sequence of the tax determination Which component

performs the calculation Which other Data Bases are involved What is the

Output

287 Which CRM Pricing Procedure is recommended for using the TTE

318 TCRM20

- 259

288 What is the hierarchical structure of the FI on the ECC Which

indentifies has each unit (3)

289 What does the hierarchical structure allow

290 What are the two main business scenarios of the CRM Billing 340 TCRM20

- 284

291 What is the process flow of Service Cycle with the Billing 341

292 What is the process flow of sale Cycle with the Billing 342

293 What is the logic Process between the ECC and the CRM regarding the

billing

294 What are the BTrs that use the Billing Doc (5 - sales and service)

295 How can two different business scenarios be integrated into one Billing

Doc

296 Which FI components must be installed and where in order to integrate

the financial Control on the Billing Docs

297 What is the CRM Billing Application

343 TCRM20

- 285

298 What are the main stages on the Billing Process What is included under

inputs Outputs

299 What is the option of integrating information from external systems into

the Billing due List

300 What other options are there by the billing docs

344

301 What are the features of the input processing 345

302 What are the 4 billing methods

303 What is a billing document spilt

304 What is a billing document merge

346 TCRM20

- 289

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc

306 What are the data sources used during the billing process

307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What

is included in each part and what are its parameters

308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding

Billing Documents

309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed

310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc

347 TCRM20

- 291

311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System

and on which cases do you use each one

312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process

348

313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the

use of each

314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool

is used for this purpose

315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting

349 TCRM20

- 292

316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan

317 Which kinds of billing plans are there

318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of

319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan

320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned

350 TCRM20

- 293

321 What is the Billing Unit

322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units

323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to

extract the information

324 To which system object is the BU assigned

351 TCRM20

- 296

325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document

326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system

Object is it defined

327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat

328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination

329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on

another document

330 What is the Billing Relevance

331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process

332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process

333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On

what is it based

352 TCRM20

- 298

334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the

ERP

335 How is it customized on the system

336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document

353 TCRM20

- 299

337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20

- 300

338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 302

339 What are the Middleware Objectives

340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his

features

341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW

connection in order to communicate with the CRM

374

375

TCRM20

- 321

342 What is the SMQ12

343 What is the TRFC

344 How the Queues are processed

345 What is the Scheduler

TCRM20

- 321

346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20

- 326

347 Where is the MW software installed

348 What is included in the CRM Server

349 What are the MW objectives (3)

TCRM20

- 327

350 Which technology runs the process 376

351 What is the Objective of the BDoc

352 What is a BDoc Type

353 What is a BDoc Instance

354 What is a BDoc message

355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc

377

378

TCRM20

- 350

356 Describe the out bounding Process

357 Describe the Inbounding Process

358 What is the use of the Queue

359 What is the administration console

360 What is the validation process

379

361 What is the Objective of the Object management

362 What is the use

363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs

380

364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and

what are the data transfer restrictions

365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and

the CRM

381

366 What is the objective of the data load

367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load

368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)

369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO

370 What is the delta Load

382

371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383

372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20

- 347

373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20

- 348

374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

responsibility of the Administration Console

375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc

376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc

377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc

386

378 What is the Data Integrity Manager

379 What is its use

387

380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and

relation between systems (6)

388

381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc

382 What are the options for debugging

391

383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the

SAP GUI

408

384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client

385 Which configuration tools are there

409

386 What are the different Business Roles (7)

387 Where are they defined

410

388 What are the different areas on the Screen

389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective

TCRM20

- 569

390 What is personalize

391 What is Help Center

392 What is System News

393 What is Central Search

TCRM20

- 570

394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20

- 571

395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles

396 To Which System Element we assign a User

411

397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412

398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR

399 What determines what will on the NB

413

400 What is the use of the Work Center

401 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 572

402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20

- 573

403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage

404 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 574

405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20

- 575

406 What is the use of the Calendar

407 What are the configuration options

TCRM20

- 576

408 Which system could be synched with the Email application

409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding

the Emails

410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which

logical links are there (4)

414 TCRM20

- 578

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center

412 What determines the Work Center

413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the

different between them

414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports

TCRM20

- 579

415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20

- 580

416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20

- 581

417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20

- 586

418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20

- 587

419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)

420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the

assignment block (4)

TCRM20

- 588

421 What is the second view possibility on the UI

422 For what is it used

423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view

424 Who may use this view

TCRM20

- 589

425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20

- 590

426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)

427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display

428 Give examples for Hierarchies

TCRM20

- 591

429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415

430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417

431 What is the role configuration key

432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key

419

433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench

434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed

by the EEWB

435 What is the user application of the EEWB

436 What is the advantage of the EEWB

437 What is the influence on other systems

421

438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422

439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20

- 613

440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each

441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user

442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model

TCRM20

- 615

443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)

444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links

445 What are the customization options of the NB profile

TCRM20

- 617

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

446 Where is the customization done

447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of

links

448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers

449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR

TCRM20

- 619

450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20

- 620

451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)

452 Where is it customized

TCRM20

- 622

453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are

they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the

influence of the layout profile on these links

TCRM20

- 623

454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples

455 Which types of function profile are there (4)

456 What determines the type of the functional profile

457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of

functional profile is it

TCRM20

- 624

458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR

459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org

unit position and user

TCRM20

- 626

460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20

- 627

461 What is the portal integration

462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the

CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal

TCRM20

- 629

463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20

- 636

464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system

465 Which authorization parameters are there

466 Where is the authorization profile defined

467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles

468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding

authorization

`

469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization

profile

TCRM20

- 641

470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role

(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)

TCRM20

- 648

471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links

472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links

473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link

474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role

475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role

476 What are the types of the WCLL

TCRM20

- 653

477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 655

478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)

479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs

480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the

different between them

TCRM20

- 669 ndash

673

481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view

the BTr Where is it defined

TCRM20

- 674

482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers

What purpose does it serve

483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based

484 What is BOL

485 What is a Genil What is its role

TCRM20

- 689

486 What is UI Component TCRM20

- 692

487 What is the model of the BSP

488 What the view of the BSP

489 What is the Controller of the BSP

TCRM20

- 694

490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the

concept

TCRM20

- 695

491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes

492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL

TCRM20

- 696

493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20

- 697

494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed

495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data

handling)

TCRM20

- 709

496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape

object it refers

497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users

TCRM20

- 732

498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key

role (5)

TCRM20

- 735

499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20

- 737

500 What is the role of the design layer

501 What is the purpose of the design layer

502 Where the design layer is logical positioned

503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are

linked to it

TCRM20

- 757

504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it

505 What is an Assignment

506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet

TCRM20

- 766

507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20

- 785

508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786

510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the

different elements

511 What are the processing restrictions

TCRM20

- 787

512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the

EEW What is the difference when creating a new table

TCRM20

- 788

513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different

between the EEW

514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)

TCRM20

- 812

515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and

which

TCRM20

- 812

516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW

517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI

518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are

not

TCRM20

- 821

519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW

when initiating a change

TCRM20

- 829

520 What is a component

521 What is the component enhancement concept

522 How does it work

523 What are the process elements when creating a new component

TCRM20

- 830

524

Question Page on

TCR

1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to

the SAP

2 What four other added values the system provides

TCRM10 -

26

3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)

4 What is the logic relation between them

5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)

TCRM10 -

27

6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)

7 What is the logic relation between them

8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)

TCRM10 -

28

9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)

10 What is the logic relation between them

TCRM10 -

29

11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -

30

12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

(8) 37

13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture

14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)

TCRM10 -

44

15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of

updates tare there

16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which

component do it What is the purpose of the verification

TCRM10 -

46

17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange

18 What is the role of the adapters

19 What is the CRM Adapter

20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas

TCRM10 -

47

21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)

22 What are the different components on the Application (3)

23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each

TCRM10 -

52

24 What is the purpose of the IC

25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)

TCRM10 -

53

26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile

users (3)

TCRM10 -

54

27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -

55

28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -

61

29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -

63

30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the

integration

31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing

TCRM10 -

80

32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan

33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)

34 What are the sub elements of a MP

35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)

36 What are the campaign characters (4)

37 What are the sub elements of a campaign

TCRM10 -

81

38 What is the meaning of segmentation

39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data

resources for each

40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers

41 What is the use of the attribute list

TCRM10 -

86

42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -

88

43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

group method

44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom

89

45 What is the activity TCRM10 -

95

46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign

47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned

TCRM10 -

96

48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)

49 How does is works (4)

50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management

51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM

TCRM10 -

108

52 What is the Process of TPM

53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of

each

TCRM10 -

109

54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -

118

55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -

119

56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -

120

57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)

58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding

E Service (7) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

133

59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -

135

60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may

perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

140

61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -

141

62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)

63 What is PRM

64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to

achieve it efficient How

TCRM10 -

150

65 What is eh concept of the PCM

66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)

TCRM10 -

151

67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management

68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each

(6)

TCRM10 -

153

69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

157

70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158

72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -

170

73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the

Business Partner integrate

TCRM10 -

171

74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -

178

75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -

179

76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose

77 Which processes it follows

78 What are its attributes (3)

TCRM10 -

188

79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -

189

80 What is the purpose of the activity Management

81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System

TCRM10 -

193

82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -

194

83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -

195

84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -

199

85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -

200

86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales

Methodology (4)

TCRM10 -

201

87 What are the initials PPM

88 What is the purpose of the tool

89 Who uses it and how (2)

TCRM10 -

201

90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -

207

91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -

208

92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to

maintain contracts

93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)

94 What is the relation between the contract and the order

TCRM10 -

218

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order

96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -

219

97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts

regarding work processes and updates (4)

TCRM10 -

220

98 What is the ICM What is his use

99 What are its business goals (3)

100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results

TCRM10 -

225

101 What are the main roles in an IC

102 What is the scratch pad

103 What is the Account info

104 What is the Alert

105 What is the Communication Information

106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers

107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system

TCRM10 -

231

108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM

109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)

TCRM10 -

232

110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be

integrated

TCRM10 -

233

111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -

234

112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the

knowledge search What are the results

TCRM10 -

235

113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)

114 What is an Interactive scripting

115 What is ERMS

116 What is the IDI

TCRM10 -

247

117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how

(3)

118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)

TCRM10 -

248

119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI

planned

120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting

121 What other IDI tools are there

TCRM10 -

249

122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of

creating a call list

TCRM10 -

250

123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)

124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)

TCRM10 -

251

125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -

257

126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 2: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

2 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Itay Abuhav

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

1 What are the key Functions in SAP CRM

2 What are the contact channels on SAP CRM

11

3 In which ways can the different SAP CRM applications be integrated in the

organization (5)

12

4 Which middleware components are to be installed in order to realize the

connection between the SAP CRM server and the ERP server (two

components)

13

5 Which interface is common and recommended for the CRM end users 17

6 What is Customization in a SAP system

7 What characterizes the Customization in SAP system (2)

8 What options have we in order to optimize customers requirements

specification on the SAP system

18

9 What is Transaction SPRO 21

10 Where do you change the design view setting (like layouts and font) on the

Web Client

22

11 What are the relevant terms for Business Partners (3)

12 How are the numbers of the entities determined

33

13 What is the main objective of a business partner

14 What is the difference between CRM Business partner model and other

ERP systems

15 What serves the business partner relationship definitions (roles) of a

business partner

34

16 What are the business partner categories

17 What is a business partner group

18 Who can be included as a business partner on the system

19 What is the meaning of an organization definition for a business partner

35

20 What is the meaning of business partner role

21 How many roles could be assigned to one business partner

36

22 What is the Objective of the BP relationship

23 What are the Attributes of a Relationship

37

24 What types of business partner relationships the system maintains

25 What is the purpose of a Relationship category

38

26 What is the BAS What are the objectives of BAS 39

27 To whom we define the marketing attributes

28 What is the Objective of the marketing attributes

29 What is the use of the marketing attributes (2)

40

30 What is the account classification What includes the account

classification

31 What is the use of account classification

32 How do you classify an account

41

33 To Which System object we assign the Lifecycle 43

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

3 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

34 What is the use of the Lifecycle Management

35 What is the relation between the Account lifecycle and the role

36 What is the relation between the Account lifecycle and the BP

37 How do you implement the lifecycle in the system transactions 44

38 What does the lifecycle determines when assigned to an entity

39 What is the relation between lifecycle and exclusion group

45

40 What is the use of mini templates

41 To which data are the mini templates assigned

42 What is the use of the Buying Center

43 To which System entity the Buying center is assigned

47

44 What are the Hierarchy nodes

45 What is the relation between a node from the ERP system and one form the

CRM

48

46 What are the hierarchy nodes Categories

47 What is the difference between them

48 What is the mobility policy in a node

49

49 Which methods there are for creating or updating BP master data in the

system (6)

50

50 What is the main difference between CRM and SAP ERP system when

handling a BP

51 What other differences are mentioned (4)

51

52 What is the main different between the CRM and the ERP when managing

BP

53 What is the basis for the difference

52

54 What is the purpose and advantages of the Easy Enhancement

Workbench

54

55 What are the Objectives of the Organizational Management

56 What is the relation between the SAP ERP and the CRM on the

organizational model

57 How the organizational Determination contributes the processes

80

58 What the three uses of the Organizational Management 81

59 What is the principle of Organizational Management 82

60 What are the suggested attributes of the CRM Organizational Model (5) 83

61 Which are the types of organizational Objects and what is the difference

between them

62 What are the attributes of each Organizational Object

84

63 What is the use of the General Attributes

64 What is the relation between the Org Unit and the position regarding the

Attributes

85

65 What are the Sales Functions on the organizational structure and their

responsibilities

66 Which one is the mandatory Function

67 What is the main difference between the various org objects

86

68 What are the service Functions on the organizational structure and their 87

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

4 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

responsibilities

69 Which one is the mandatory Function

70 What is the main difference between the various org objects

71 What is the Marketing Functions on the organizational structure

72 What functions the Marketing organization allows us

73 What is its significance in compare with Sales and Services

88

74 What are the two methods to determine Organizational data to a

transaction

91

75 How does the system locate data and from where for realizing a

Transaction

76 Which two Kinds of rules guide the system when determining the data for

Transactions

77 Why is it required to determine certain rules to certain transactions

92

78 What is the system process flow of the Organizational data determination

79 What is the sequence of configuration flow of the Organizational data

determination

95

80 What are the product types in the CRM system (6)

81 What kinds of product data can be transferred from the ERP to the CRM

82 What is the reason that the data cannot be changed

111 TCRM10

ndash 481

83 What option is there to changes unchangeable product data on the CRM

system that sourced from the ERP

84 What is the sequence of creating a product on the ERP and transferring it to

the CRM and which system middle is required

113 TCRM10

- 482

85 What is the objective of the relationship

86 What are Accessories Customers products Vendors products Service

Products Spare part product Component products Warranties

87 Which system condition should be maintained in order to set the relationship

type

114 TCRM10

- 482

88 What are the Objectives of a Competitor Product

89 What is the use of the competitor product

90 What kind of Product type is a Competitor Product

91 Which transaction can use the competitor product

115 TCRM10

-484

92 What is the hierarchy of product definition

93 What is the definition and purpose of a Set Type

94 What are the Set Type elements

95 Which kind of set types has the product master and what each one

contains

116 TCRM10

- 490

96 What is the basic Set Type definition and Hierarchies for a product on the

CRM System

97 What is the sequence of transferring product from the ERP to the CRM

98 What is the requirement for Material product that was transferred from the

ERP

99 What is the significance of assigning a product to the product type

100 What is the difference between the hierarchy assignment to the different

product types in the CRM system And why

117

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

5 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

101 What is the different type of service products

102 What is the Warranty product and which kind of warranty product there

are

118 TCRM10

- 492

103 What is the objective on an Attribute

104 What are the parameters that define Attribute

105 What are the Objective of Set types

106 Which options are there for Set types uses

107 What is the set type restriction

108 Which Object is assigned to another

109 What are the mini templates

119 TCRM10

- 493

110 What enables the Product Category

111 What is the Objective of Product Category

112 Describe the logic behind the structure of Hierarchies and Product

Category and set type What is the role of the set type

120 TCRM10

ndash 493

113 What are the various elements necessary to enhance a Product 121 TCRM10

ndash 493

114 What is an Adapter Object

115 What is the two required downloads when replicating data from the ERP

to the CRM

122 TCRM10

- 493

116 What are the Objectives (3) of a Transaction

117 What are the options between various transactions (3)

151 TCRM20

-1 ndash 17

118 What are the two different areas on a transaction and what is the

difference between them

119 What is the use of a BTr

120 What is the use of the BTr Type

121 What is the additional level that a sales BTr has Which check is

required to operate this level

152 TCRM20

-1 - 18

122 What is determined when a TrTy is set for a BTr What are the three

elements

123 Name a few of the Transactions Characteristics

124 What is the restriction when working with a BTr regarding follow ups

125 What is the objective of a TrTy

126 What are the Blocking Reasons Where is it defined

127 What is the use of the permission channels

153 TCRM20

ndash 19 - 51

128 What triggers the Item Category

129 What are the attributes determined by the Item Category

130 Which data and profiles are fixed on an Item Category and what

resembles these data For which type of information are they divided

131 Which data is then determined and what resembles these data

154 TCRM20

ndash 20-54

132 What is the Item Category Group Where is it defined

133 What is the sequence of the item category determination

134 What is the condition regarding the item category determination when

replicating information from the ERP to the CRM Why

155 TCRM20

- 54

135 How the system does determine the Item Category

136 What are the options for Item category determination aside from the

156 TCRM20

- 55

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

6 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

default ones

137 What are the two options to maintain Preceding and subsequent

Documents

138 What is necessary in order to carry them out

139 What is the restriction when performing a copy control for a Transaction

157 TCRM20

- 93

140 What is the objective Transaction History

141 What is the difference between different kinds of transactions

142 What does the Transaction History allow

143 What triggers the transaction History

158 TCRM20

ndash 95

144 What is the sequence of the copy control

145 In Which cases the Copy control is mandatory

146 What is the case with Service when performing copy control

159 TCRM20

- 97

147 What is linking a document subsequently

148 What is copied and what is not copied when linking a document

subsequently

149 What is updated when the subsequent link was done

150 Which profile is required in order to allow a subsequent link

160 TCRM20

- 98

151 What are the Basic Functions in a BTr and what is the objective and use

of each (profiles)

161 TCRM20

- 98

152 What are the notes Which kinds of notes the system offers

153 What are the notes features

154 To which SO can these notes be maintained

162 TCRM20

- 99

155 How looks the Hierarchy of the TDP

156 What is determined for the Text under the TDP

157 To which SO assign one the TDP

163 TCRM20

- 100

158 What is the Objective of the Date Management

159 In which cases the Date Management is usable

160 For which BTr the date management is used

161 What are the characteristics of the Date Management

162 According to which System Object the Date Management rule is

determined

164 TCRM20

- 102

163 What are Date Types

164 What are durations

165 What are the date rules

165 TCRM20

- 103

166 What is the objective of the status management and what is the use

167 What Kind of System Statuses are managed on the System

168 What are the User Status restriction regarding a BTr

169 What are the User Status options regarding a User

166 TCRM20

- 104

170 Which system Objects determine the status Profile

171 What is necessary to define and activate a status profile on the system

172 What is a status number

173 What is determined when a status profile is called Which another

system rule is then required

167 TCRM20

- 105

174 What is the Objective Incompleteness Check

175 What is the use of the Incompleteness Check

168 TCRM20

- 107

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

7 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

176 What is the hierarchy of the Incompleteness Process To which system

object is it assigned

177 What is the objective of the Change History What are the three

parameters

178 Where is the Change History defined

170 TCRM20

- 130

179 What is the Objective of the activity

180 What kinds of Activities are there in the System

181 What characterizes an Activity What is the difference from other BTr

(3)

182 What are the two leading Business Transactions Categories for activities

that are defined in the System What is the difference between them

183 What is the relation between activities and other BTr

217 TCRM20

- 131

184 What is the Business Activity Structure And what is included

185 What is the relation between the activity Category and the Transaction

Type

218

186 What is included under the default data on the activity TrTy

187 What is required in order to add product to activities

219 TCRM20

- 136

188 What are the options for Follow-up Activities on the System What is the

difference between them

220 TCRM20

- 137

189 What are the characteristics of a questionnaire 221 TCRM20

- 137

190 What is the main purpose of the Activity Journal

191 What is the use of the Journal Activity

192 What is required in order to track Products

193 What is the relation with other TrTy

222 TCRM20

- 140

194 What is the objective of the connection between the CRM System and

the groupware

195 What is the use of the groupware application

196 What is required when defining the groupware

197 What are the system requirements for operating the groupware

223 TCRM20

- 142

198 What are the Objects that could be transferred between the CRM and a

Groupware System

199 Which Technology Elements are used to execute this option What

components are required

224 TCRM20

- 144

200 What is the activity analysis

201 What is necessary in order to be able to create reports

225

202 What is the objective of the PP

203 What is the use of the PP (5)

204 What are the most important sources of information are in the PP

243 TCRM20

- 168

205 What triggers the PP

206 What is the process sequence of the PP

244 TCRM20

- 169

207 What are the four principles of the PP (for data entering for document

for process)

245 TCRM20

- 171

208 What is the Partner Function Category 246 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

8 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

209 What is the Partner Function

210 What is the Partner Determination Procedure

211 What is the Access Sequence

- 176

212 What is the customizing restriction regarding the assignment of a Partner

Function What are the Hierarchy and Relation between the Partner

Function Category and the Partner Function

213 What is the Relationship Category What is the Relation between the

Partner Function Category and the Relationship Category What is the

connection to the Access sequence

214 What is the use of the Lock

215 What is the Undefined Partner

247 TCRM20

- 178

216 What is the Objective of the PDP

217 What is the use of the PDP

218 Which main data sources are used by the PDP

219 What type of data the PDP brings

220 Which data is determined in the PDP (4)

221 Which PDP parameters are defined (2)

222 To what we assign the Partner Determination Procedure

248 TCRM20

- 179

223 What is the Objective of the Access Sequence

224 What is the Use of the Access Sequence For which objects is it

referring

225 What is the option when no Access Sequence is determined

249 TCRM20

- 180

226 What is the order of events of data determination when processing a

process in the system

227 What are the parameters checked by the AS

228 Which customizing condition regarding the system process is required in

order to relate a PDP to a TrTy

229 What happens when a BP is determined on the PDP but no AS is

assigned to him

250 TCRM20

- 181

230 What is the purpose of actions on the System

231 What is the use of actions on the System

232 What is the terminology for the actions processing

273 TCRM20

- 207

233 What is the sequence of events for executing an action

234 To which System Element the Action Profile is assigned

235 What is the purpose of an Action Profile

236 Which Parameters are determined in the Action Profile regarding the

execution of actions

274 TCRM20

- 208

237 What is the Start Condition and the Schedule Condition on the System

and what is the relation between them

238 For which SO are the conditions assigned

239 What are the two mode of defining them

275 TCRM20

- 209

240 What is the purpose of the Processing Time

241 What kind of Processing Time the System allows and what is the

difference between them (3) Give examples for each

242 To which System Object do we assign the Processing Time

276 TCRM20

- 210

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

9 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

243 Where can we view the assigned actions What parameters are shown

244 What are the Processing types in the System and what is the purpose of

each one

277 TCRM20

- 211

245 What is the Hierarchy of the Action Profile definition

246 What are the parameters of the action profile and which characters has

each

247 What is the relation between a Transaction type and the Action Profile

278 TCRM20

- 212

248 What is the sequence of event when for an action profile to go in active 279 TCRM20

- 213

249 What is a Smart Form How does it work

250 Which kind of examples of activities documentation could be designed on

the SAP Smart Form

281 TCRM20

- 215

251 What is the purpose of the Action Monitor

252 Where is it originated

253 What is the use of the action monitor

254 What is the relation between the action monitor and the selection report

282 TCRM20

- 215

255 What is the responsible component for the Pricing in the CRM System

On which technology is it based

256 Which Pricing elements are included in the IPC From where comes the

relevant data (4 ndash sales product tax)

257 What is the use of the PP

258 On which SAP applications can the IPC be used What are the pricing

possibilities with it

259 What are the limitations of transferring pricing data from the ERP to the

CRM And why httphelpsapcomerp2005_ehp_04helpdataEN352cd77bd7705394e10000009b387c12framesethtm

305 TCRM20

- 243

260 What are the two Implementation Scenarios for the IPC and what is the

difference between them

306 TCRM20

- 244

261 What is the logic structure of the PP

262 On which parameters does the PP influence the Condition types (5 ndash the

use calculation )

307 TCRM20

- 245

263 Which System Objects and Data sources determine the Pricing

Procedure (5)

308 TCRM20

- 246

264 What is the Objective of the Con Ty On which system Object is it

operative

265 What are the characteristics of the Cond Ty

309 TCRM20

- 248

266 What is the objective of the Sequence Access

267 What is the Hierarchy between the AS and the Con Ty

268 Where is it used on the System What is the sequence of events when a

Con Is operated

269 What is a condition record

310 TCRM20

- 249

270 What is the Condition Tables

271 How does the condition Table is activated

272 What is the main restriction regarding the condition table

311 TCRM20

- 250

273 What is the Sequence of events during the Pricing Procedure 312 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

10 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

274 Which Condition techniques are already determined in the System - 251

275 What is the role of the Condition Records on the Pricing Procedure

276 What is the sequence of events of the condition record in the process of

pricing How does a Condition Record calculate the result What other

possibilities are

277 What is the Value scale

313 TCRM20

- 255

278 To which System Object could Conditions be maintained 314 TCRM20

- 256

279 What is included under the Condition Group 315

280 What is the Price Analysis

281 What is the use

282 When is it possible to use it

316 TCRM20

- 257

283 Which different function and uses (other than the regular pricing used on

a BTr) has the Pricing Process

284 What are the restrictions of pricing procedures on CRM

317 TCRM20

- 258

285 What are the different data sources for the Tax Determination

286 How is the Sequence of the tax determination Which component

performs the calculation Which other Data Bases are involved What is the

Output

287 Which CRM Pricing Procedure is recommended for using the TTE

318 TCRM20

- 259

288 What is the hierarchical structure of the FI on the ECC Which

indentifies has each unit (3)

289 What does the hierarchical structure allow

290 What are the two main business scenarios of the CRM Billing 340 TCRM20

- 284

291 What is the process flow of Service Cycle with the Billing 341

292 What is the process flow of sale Cycle with the Billing 342

293 What is the logic Process between the ECC and the CRM regarding the

billing

294 What are the BTrs that use the Billing Doc (5 - sales and service)

295 How can two different business scenarios be integrated into one Billing

Doc

296 Which FI components must be installed and where in order to integrate

the financial Control on the Billing Docs

297 What is the CRM Billing Application

343 TCRM20

- 285

298 What are the main stages on the Billing Process What is included under

inputs Outputs

299 What is the option of integrating information from external systems into

the Billing due List

300 What other options are there by the billing docs

344

301 What are the features of the input processing 345

302 What are the 4 billing methods

303 What is a billing document spilt

304 What is a billing document merge

346 TCRM20

- 289

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc

306 What are the data sources used during the billing process

307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What

is included in each part and what are its parameters

308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding

Billing Documents

309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed

310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc

347 TCRM20

- 291

311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System

and on which cases do you use each one

312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process

348

313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the

use of each

314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool

is used for this purpose

315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting

349 TCRM20

- 292

316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan

317 Which kinds of billing plans are there

318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of

319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan

320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned

350 TCRM20

- 293

321 What is the Billing Unit

322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units

323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to

extract the information

324 To which system object is the BU assigned

351 TCRM20

- 296

325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document

326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system

Object is it defined

327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat

328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination

329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on

another document

330 What is the Billing Relevance

331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process

332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process

333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On

what is it based

352 TCRM20

- 298

334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the

ERP

335 How is it customized on the system

336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document

353 TCRM20

- 299

337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20

- 300

338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 302

339 What are the Middleware Objectives

340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his

features

341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW

connection in order to communicate with the CRM

374

375

TCRM20

- 321

342 What is the SMQ12

343 What is the TRFC

344 How the Queues are processed

345 What is the Scheduler

TCRM20

- 321

346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20

- 326

347 Where is the MW software installed

348 What is included in the CRM Server

349 What are the MW objectives (3)

TCRM20

- 327

350 Which technology runs the process 376

351 What is the Objective of the BDoc

352 What is a BDoc Type

353 What is a BDoc Instance

354 What is a BDoc message

355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc

377

378

TCRM20

- 350

356 Describe the out bounding Process

357 Describe the Inbounding Process

358 What is the use of the Queue

359 What is the administration console

360 What is the validation process

379

361 What is the Objective of the Object management

362 What is the use

363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs

380

364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and

what are the data transfer restrictions

365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and

the CRM

381

366 What is the objective of the data load

367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load

368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)

369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO

370 What is the delta Load

382

371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383

372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20

- 347

373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20

- 348

374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

responsibility of the Administration Console

375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc

376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc

377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc

386

378 What is the Data Integrity Manager

379 What is its use

387

380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and

relation between systems (6)

388

381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc

382 What are the options for debugging

391

383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the

SAP GUI

408

384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client

385 Which configuration tools are there

409

386 What are the different Business Roles (7)

387 Where are they defined

410

388 What are the different areas on the Screen

389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective

TCRM20

- 569

390 What is personalize

391 What is Help Center

392 What is System News

393 What is Central Search

TCRM20

- 570

394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20

- 571

395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles

396 To Which System Element we assign a User

411

397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412

398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR

399 What determines what will on the NB

413

400 What is the use of the Work Center

401 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 572

402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20

- 573

403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage

404 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 574

405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20

- 575

406 What is the use of the Calendar

407 What are the configuration options

TCRM20

- 576

408 Which system could be synched with the Email application

409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding

the Emails

410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which

logical links are there (4)

414 TCRM20

- 578

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center

412 What determines the Work Center

413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the

different between them

414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports

TCRM20

- 579

415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20

- 580

416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20

- 581

417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20

- 586

418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20

- 587

419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)

420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the

assignment block (4)

TCRM20

- 588

421 What is the second view possibility on the UI

422 For what is it used

423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view

424 Who may use this view

TCRM20

- 589

425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20

- 590

426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)

427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display

428 Give examples for Hierarchies

TCRM20

- 591

429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415

430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417

431 What is the role configuration key

432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key

419

433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench

434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed

by the EEWB

435 What is the user application of the EEWB

436 What is the advantage of the EEWB

437 What is the influence on other systems

421

438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422

439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20

- 613

440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each

441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user

442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model

TCRM20

- 615

443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)

444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links

445 What are the customization options of the NB profile

TCRM20

- 617

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

446 Where is the customization done

447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of

links

448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers

449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR

TCRM20

- 619

450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20

- 620

451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)

452 Where is it customized

TCRM20

- 622

453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are

they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the

influence of the layout profile on these links

TCRM20

- 623

454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples

455 Which types of function profile are there (4)

456 What determines the type of the functional profile

457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of

functional profile is it

TCRM20

- 624

458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR

459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org

unit position and user

TCRM20

- 626

460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20

- 627

461 What is the portal integration

462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the

CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal

TCRM20

- 629

463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20

- 636

464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system

465 Which authorization parameters are there

466 Where is the authorization profile defined

467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles

468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding

authorization

`

469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization

profile

TCRM20

- 641

470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role

(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)

TCRM20

- 648

471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links

472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links

473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link

474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role

475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role

476 What are the types of the WCLL

TCRM20

- 653

477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 655

478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)

479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs

480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the

different between them

TCRM20

- 669 ndash

673

481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view

the BTr Where is it defined

TCRM20

- 674

482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers

What purpose does it serve

483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based

484 What is BOL

485 What is a Genil What is its role

TCRM20

- 689

486 What is UI Component TCRM20

- 692

487 What is the model of the BSP

488 What the view of the BSP

489 What is the Controller of the BSP

TCRM20

- 694

490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the

concept

TCRM20

- 695

491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes

492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL

TCRM20

- 696

493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20

- 697

494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed

495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data

handling)

TCRM20

- 709

496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape

object it refers

497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users

TCRM20

- 732

498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key

role (5)

TCRM20

- 735

499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20

- 737

500 What is the role of the design layer

501 What is the purpose of the design layer

502 Where the design layer is logical positioned

503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are

linked to it

TCRM20

- 757

504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it

505 What is an Assignment

506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet

TCRM20

- 766

507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20

- 785

508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786

510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the

different elements

511 What are the processing restrictions

TCRM20

- 787

512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the

EEW What is the difference when creating a new table

TCRM20

- 788

513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different

between the EEW

514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)

TCRM20

- 812

515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and

which

TCRM20

- 812

516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW

517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI

518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are

not

TCRM20

- 821

519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW

when initiating a change

TCRM20

- 829

520 What is a component

521 What is the component enhancement concept

522 How does it work

523 What are the process elements when creating a new component

TCRM20

- 830

524

Question Page on

TCR

1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to

the SAP

2 What four other added values the system provides

TCRM10 -

26

3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)

4 What is the logic relation between them

5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)

TCRM10 -

27

6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)

7 What is the logic relation between them

8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)

TCRM10 -

28

9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)

10 What is the logic relation between them

TCRM10 -

29

11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -

30

12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

(8) 37

13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture

14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)

TCRM10 -

44

15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of

updates tare there

16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which

component do it What is the purpose of the verification

TCRM10 -

46

17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange

18 What is the role of the adapters

19 What is the CRM Adapter

20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas

TCRM10 -

47

21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)

22 What are the different components on the Application (3)

23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each

TCRM10 -

52

24 What is the purpose of the IC

25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)

TCRM10 -

53

26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile

users (3)

TCRM10 -

54

27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -

55

28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -

61

29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -

63

30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the

integration

31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing

TCRM10 -

80

32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan

33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)

34 What are the sub elements of a MP

35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)

36 What are the campaign characters (4)

37 What are the sub elements of a campaign

TCRM10 -

81

38 What is the meaning of segmentation

39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data

resources for each

40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers

41 What is the use of the attribute list

TCRM10 -

86

42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -

88

43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

group method

44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom

89

45 What is the activity TCRM10 -

95

46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign

47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned

TCRM10 -

96

48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)

49 How does is works (4)

50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management

51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM

TCRM10 -

108

52 What is the Process of TPM

53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of

each

TCRM10 -

109

54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -

118

55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -

119

56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -

120

57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)

58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding

E Service (7) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

133

59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -

135

60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may

perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

140

61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -

141

62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)

63 What is PRM

64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to

achieve it efficient How

TCRM10 -

150

65 What is eh concept of the PCM

66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)

TCRM10 -

151

67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management

68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each

(6)

TCRM10 -

153

69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

157

70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158

72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -

170

73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the

Business Partner integrate

TCRM10 -

171

74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -

178

75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -

179

76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose

77 Which processes it follows

78 What are its attributes (3)

TCRM10 -

188

79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -

189

80 What is the purpose of the activity Management

81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System

TCRM10 -

193

82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -

194

83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -

195

84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -

199

85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -

200

86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales

Methodology (4)

TCRM10 -

201

87 What are the initials PPM

88 What is the purpose of the tool

89 Who uses it and how (2)

TCRM10 -

201

90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -

207

91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -

208

92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to

maintain contracts

93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)

94 What is the relation between the contract and the order

TCRM10 -

218

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order

96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -

219

97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts

regarding work processes and updates (4)

TCRM10 -

220

98 What is the ICM What is his use

99 What are its business goals (3)

100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results

TCRM10 -

225

101 What are the main roles in an IC

102 What is the scratch pad

103 What is the Account info

104 What is the Alert

105 What is the Communication Information

106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers

107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system

TCRM10 -

231

108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM

109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)

TCRM10 -

232

110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be

integrated

TCRM10 -

233

111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -

234

112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the

knowledge search What are the results

TCRM10 -

235

113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)

114 What is an Interactive scripting

115 What is ERMS

116 What is the IDI

TCRM10 -

247

117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how

(3)

118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)

TCRM10 -

248

119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI

planned

120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting

121 What other IDI tools are there

TCRM10 -

249

122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of

creating a call list

TCRM10 -

250

123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)

124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)

TCRM10 -

251

125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -

257

126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 3: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

3 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

34 What is the use of the Lifecycle Management

35 What is the relation between the Account lifecycle and the role

36 What is the relation between the Account lifecycle and the BP

37 How do you implement the lifecycle in the system transactions 44

38 What does the lifecycle determines when assigned to an entity

39 What is the relation between lifecycle and exclusion group

45

40 What is the use of mini templates

41 To which data are the mini templates assigned

42 What is the use of the Buying Center

43 To which System entity the Buying center is assigned

47

44 What are the Hierarchy nodes

45 What is the relation between a node from the ERP system and one form the

CRM

48

46 What are the hierarchy nodes Categories

47 What is the difference between them

48 What is the mobility policy in a node

49

49 Which methods there are for creating or updating BP master data in the

system (6)

50

50 What is the main difference between CRM and SAP ERP system when

handling a BP

51 What other differences are mentioned (4)

51

52 What is the main different between the CRM and the ERP when managing

BP

53 What is the basis for the difference

52

54 What is the purpose and advantages of the Easy Enhancement

Workbench

54

55 What are the Objectives of the Organizational Management

56 What is the relation between the SAP ERP and the CRM on the

organizational model

57 How the organizational Determination contributes the processes

80

58 What the three uses of the Organizational Management 81

59 What is the principle of Organizational Management 82

60 What are the suggested attributes of the CRM Organizational Model (5) 83

61 Which are the types of organizational Objects and what is the difference

between them

62 What are the attributes of each Organizational Object

84

63 What is the use of the General Attributes

64 What is the relation between the Org Unit and the position regarding the

Attributes

85

65 What are the Sales Functions on the organizational structure and their

responsibilities

66 Which one is the mandatory Function

67 What is the main difference between the various org objects

86

68 What are the service Functions on the organizational structure and their 87

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

4 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

responsibilities

69 Which one is the mandatory Function

70 What is the main difference between the various org objects

71 What is the Marketing Functions on the organizational structure

72 What functions the Marketing organization allows us

73 What is its significance in compare with Sales and Services

88

74 What are the two methods to determine Organizational data to a

transaction

91

75 How does the system locate data and from where for realizing a

Transaction

76 Which two Kinds of rules guide the system when determining the data for

Transactions

77 Why is it required to determine certain rules to certain transactions

92

78 What is the system process flow of the Organizational data determination

79 What is the sequence of configuration flow of the Organizational data

determination

95

80 What are the product types in the CRM system (6)

81 What kinds of product data can be transferred from the ERP to the CRM

82 What is the reason that the data cannot be changed

111 TCRM10

ndash 481

83 What option is there to changes unchangeable product data on the CRM

system that sourced from the ERP

84 What is the sequence of creating a product on the ERP and transferring it to

the CRM and which system middle is required

113 TCRM10

- 482

85 What is the objective of the relationship

86 What are Accessories Customers products Vendors products Service

Products Spare part product Component products Warranties

87 Which system condition should be maintained in order to set the relationship

type

114 TCRM10

- 482

88 What are the Objectives of a Competitor Product

89 What is the use of the competitor product

90 What kind of Product type is a Competitor Product

91 Which transaction can use the competitor product

115 TCRM10

-484

92 What is the hierarchy of product definition

93 What is the definition and purpose of a Set Type

94 What are the Set Type elements

95 Which kind of set types has the product master and what each one

contains

116 TCRM10

- 490

96 What is the basic Set Type definition and Hierarchies for a product on the

CRM System

97 What is the sequence of transferring product from the ERP to the CRM

98 What is the requirement for Material product that was transferred from the

ERP

99 What is the significance of assigning a product to the product type

100 What is the difference between the hierarchy assignment to the different

product types in the CRM system And why

117

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

5 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

101 What is the different type of service products

102 What is the Warranty product and which kind of warranty product there

are

118 TCRM10

- 492

103 What is the objective on an Attribute

104 What are the parameters that define Attribute

105 What are the Objective of Set types

106 Which options are there for Set types uses

107 What is the set type restriction

108 Which Object is assigned to another

109 What are the mini templates

119 TCRM10

- 493

110 What enables the Product Category

111 What is the Objective of Product Category

112 Describe the logic behind the structure of Hierarchies and Product

Category and set type What is the role of the set type

120 TCRM10

ndash 493

113 What are the various elements necessary to enhance a Product 121 TCRM10

ndash 493

114 What is an Adapter Object

115 What is the two required downloads when replicating data from the ERP

to the CRM

122 TCRM10

- 493

116 What are the Objectives (3) of a Transaction

117 What are the options between various transactions (3)

151 TCRM20

-1 ndash 17

118 What are the two different areas on a transaction and what is the

difference between them

119 What is the use of a BTr

120 What is the use of the BTr Type

121 What is the additional level that a sales BTr has Which check is

required to operate this level

152 TCRM20

-1 - 18

122 What is determined when a TrTy is set for a BTr What are the three

elements

123 Name a few of the Transactions Characteristics

124 What is the restriction when working with a BTr regarding follow ups

125 What is the objective of a TrTy

126 What are the Blocking Reasons Where is it defined

127 What is the use of the permission channels

153 TCRM20

ndash 19 - 51

128 What triggers the Item Category

129 What are the attributes determined by the Item Category

130 Which data and profiles are fixed on an Item Category and what

resembles these data For which type of information are they divided

131 Which data is then determined and what resembles these data

154 TCRM20

ndash 20-54

132 What is the Item Category Group Where is it defined

133 What is the sequence of the item category determination

134 What is the condition regarding the item category determination when

replicating information from the ERP to the CRM Why

155 TCRM20

- 54

135 How the system does determine the Item Category

136 What are the options for Item category determination aside from the

156 TCRM20

- 55

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

6 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

default ones

137 What are the two options to maintain Preceding and subsequent

Documents

138 What is necessary in order to carry them out

139 What is the restriction when performing a copy control for a Transaction

157 TCRM20

- 93

140 What is the objective Transaction History

141 What is the difference between different kinds of transactions

142 What does the Transaction History allow

143 What triggers the transaction History

158 TCRM20

ndash 95

144 What is the sequence of the copy control

145 In Which cases the Copy control is mandatory

146 What is the case with Service when performing copy control

159 TCRM20

- 97

147 What is linking a document subsequently

148 What is copied and what is not copied when linking a document

subsequently

149 What is updated when the subsequent link was done

150 Which profile is required in order to allow a subsequent link

160 TCRM20

- 98

151 What are the Basic Functions in a BTr and what is the objective and use

of each (profiles)

161 TCRM20

- 98

152 What are the notes Which kinds of notes the system offers

153 What are the notes features

154 To which SO can these notes be maintained

162 TCRM20

- 99

155 How looks the Hierarchy of the TDP

156 What is determined for the Text under the TDP

157 To which SO assign one the TDP

163 TCRM20

- 100

158 What is the Objective of the Date Management

159 In which cases the Date Management is usable

160 For which BTr the date management is used

161 What are the characteristics of the Date Management

162 According to which System Object the Date Management rule is

determined

164 TCRM20

- 102

163 What are Date Types

164 What are durations

165 What are the date rules

165 TCRM20

- 103

166 What is the objective of the status management and what is the use

167 What Kind of System Statuses are managed on the System

168 What are the User Status restriction regarding a BTr

169 What are the User Status options regarding a User

166 TCRM20

- 104

170 Which system Objects determine the status Profile

171 What is necessary to define and activate a status profile on the system

172 What is a status number

173 What is determined when a status profile is called Which another

system rule is then required

167 TCRM20

- 105

174 What is the Objective Incompleteness Check

175 What is the use of the Incompleteness Check

168 TCRM20

- 107

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

7 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

176 What is the hierarchy of the Incompleteness Process To which system

object is it assigned

177 What is the objective of the Change History What are the three

parameters

178 Where is the Change History defined

170 TCRM20

- 130

179 What is the Objective of the activity

180 What kinds of Activities are there in the System

181 What characterizes an Activity What is the difference from other BTr

(3)

182 What are the two leading Business Transactions Categories for activities

that are defined in the System What is the difference between them

183 What is the relation between activities and other BTr

217 TCRM20

- 131

184 What is the Business Activity Structure And what is included

185 What is the relation between the activity Category and the Transaction

Type

218

186 What is included under the default data on the activity TrTy

187 What is required in order to add product to activities

219 TCRM20

- 136

188 What are the options for Follow-up Activities on the System What is the

difference between them

220 TCRM20

- 137

189 What are the characteristics of a questionnaire 221 TCRM20

- 137

190 What is the main purpose of the Activity Journal

191 What is the use of the Journal Activity

192 What is required in order to track Products

193 What is the relation with other TrTy

222 TCRM20

- 140

194 What is the objective of the connection between the CRM System and

the groupware

195 What is the use of the groupware application

196 What is required when defining the groupware

197 What are the system requirements for operating the groupware

223 TCRM20

- 142

198 What are the Objects that could be transferred between the CRM and a

Groupware System

199 Which Technology Elements are used to execute this option What

components are required

224 TCRM20

- 144

200 What is the activity analysis

201 What is necessary in order to be able to create reports

225

202 What is the objective of the PP

203 What is the use of the PP (5)

204 What are the most important sources of information are in the PP

243 TCRM20

- 168

205 What triggers the PP

206 What is the process sequence of the PP

244 TCRM20

- 169

207 What are the four principles of the PP (for data entering for document

for process)

245 TCRM20

- 171

208 What is the Partner Function Category 246 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

8 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

209 What is the Partner Function

210 What is the Partner Determination Procedure

211 What is the Access Sequence

- 176

212 What is the customizing restriction regarding the assignment of a Partner

Function What are the Hierarchy and Relation between the Partner

Function Category and the Partner Function

213 What is the Relationship Category What is the Relation between the

Partner Function Category and the Relationship Category What is the

connection to the Access sequence

214 What is the use of the Lock

215 What is the Undefined Partner

247 TCRM20

- 178

216 What is the Objective of the PDP

217 What is the use of the PDP

218 Which main data sources are used by the PDP

219 What type of data the PDP brings

220 Which data is determined in the PDP (4)

221 Which PDP parameters are defined (2)

222 To what we assign the Partner Determination Procedure

248 TCRM20

- 179

223 What is the Objective of the Access Sequence

224 What is the Use of the Access Sequence For which objects is it

referring

225 What is the option when no Access Sequence is determined

249 TCRM20

- 180

226 What is the order of events of data determination when processing a

process in the system

227 What are the parameters checked by the AS

228 Which customizing condition regarding the system process is required in

order to relate a PDP to a TrTy

229 What happens when a BP is determined on the PDP but no AS is

assigned to him

250 TCRM20

- 181

230 What is the purpose of actions on the System

231 What is the use of actions on the System

232 What is the terminology for the actions processing

273 TCRM20

- 207

233 What is the sequence of events for executing an action

234 To which System Element the Action Profile is assigned

235 What is the purpose of an Action Profile

236 Which Parameters are determined in the Action Profile regarding the

execution of actions

274 TCRM20

- 208

237 What is the Start Condition and the Schedule Condition on the System

and what is the relation between them

238 For which SO are the conditions assigned

239 What are the two mode of defining them

275 TCRM20

- 209

240 What is the purpose of the Processing Time

241 What kind of Processing Time the System allows and what is the

difference between them (3) Give examples for each

242 To which System Object do we assign the Processing Time

276 TCRM20

- 210

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

9 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

243 Where can we view the assigned actions What parameters are shown

244 What are the Processing types in the System and what is the purpose of

each one

277 TCRM20

- 211

245 What is the Hierarchy of the Action Profile definition

246 What are the parameters of the action profile and which characters has

each

247 What is the relation between a Transaction type and the Action Profile

278 TCRM20

- 212

248 What is the sequence of event when for an action profile to go in active 279 TCRM20

- 213

249 What is a Smart Form How does it work

250 Which kind of examples of activities documentation could be designed on

the SAP Smart Form

281 TCRM20

- 215

251 What is the purpose of the Action Monitor

252 Where is it originated

253 What is the use of the action monitor

254 What is the relation between the action monitor and the selection report

282 TCRM20

- 215

255 What is the responsible component for the Pricing in the CRM System

On which technology is it based

256 Which Pricing elements are included in the IPC From where comes the

relevant data (4 ndash sales product tax)

257 What is the use of the PP

258 On which SAP applications can the IPC be used What are the pricing

possibilities with it

259 What are the limitations of transferring pricing data from the ERP to the

CRM And why httphelpsapcomerp2005_ehp_04helpdataEN352cd77bd7705394e10000009b387c12framesethtm

305 TCRM20

- 243

260 What are the two Implementation Scenarios for the IPC and what is the

difference between them

306 TCRM20

- 244

261 What is the logic structure of the PP

262 On which parameters does the PP influence the Condition types (5 ndash the

use calculation )

307 TCRM20

- 245

263 Which System Objects and Data sources determine the Pricing

Procedure (5)

308 TCRM20

- 246

264 What is the Objective of the Con Ty On which system Object is it

operative

265 What are the characteristics of the Cond Ty

309 TCRM20

- 248

266 What is the objective of the Sequence Access

267 What is the Hierarchy between the AS and the Con Ty

268 Where is it used on the System What is the sequence of events when a

Con Is operated

269 What is a condition record

310 TCRM20

- 249

270 What is the Condition Tables

271 How does the condition Table is activated

272 What is the main restriction regarding the condition table

311 TCRM20

- 250

273 What is the Sequence of events during the Pricing Procedure 312 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

10 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

274 Which Condition techniques are already determined in the System - 251

275 What is the role of the Condition Records on the Pricing Procedure

276 What is the sequence of events of the condition record in the process of

pricing How does a Condition Record calculate the result What other

possibilities are

277 What is the Value scale

313 TCRM20

- 255

278 To which System Object could Conditions be maintained 314 TCRM20

- 256

279 What is included under the Condition Group 315

280 What is the Price Analysis

281 What is the use

282 When is it possible to use it

316 TCRM20

- 257

283 Which different function and uses (other than the regular pricing used on

a BTr) has the Pricing Process

284 What are the restrictions of pricing procedures on CRM

317 TCRM20

- 258

285 What are the different data sources for the Tax Determination

286 How is the Sequence of the tax determination Which component

performs the calculation Which other Data Bases are involved What is the

Output

287 Which CRM Pricing Procedure is recommended for using the TTE

318 TCRM20

- 259

288 What is the hierarchical structure of the FI on the ECC Which

indentifies has each unit (3)

289 What does the hierarchical structure allow

290 What are the two main business scenarios of the CRM Billing 340 TCRM20

- 284

291 What is the process flow of Service Cycle with the Billing 341

292 What is the process flow of sale Cycle with the Billing 342

293 What is the logic Process between the ECC and the CRM regarding the

billing

294 What are the BTrs that use the Billing Doc (5 - sales and service)

295 How can two different business scenarios be integrated into one Billing

Doc

296 Which FI components must be installed and where in order to integrate

the financial Control on the Billing Docs

297 What is the CRM Billing Application

343 TCRM20

- 285

298 What are the main stages on the Billing Process What is included under

inputs Outputs

299 What is the option of integrating information from external systems into

the Billing due List

300 What other options are there by the billing docs

344

301 What are the features of the input processing 345

302 What are the 4 billing methods

303 What is a billing document spilt

304 What is a billing document merge

346 TCRM20

- 289

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc

306 What are the data sources used during the billing process

307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What

is included in each part and what are its parameters

308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding

Billing Documents

309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed

310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc

347 TCRM20

- 291

311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System

and on which cases do you use each one

312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process

348

313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the

use of each

314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool

is used for this purpose

315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting

349 TCRM20

- 292

316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan

317 Which kinds of billing plans are there

318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of

319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan

320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned

350 TCRM20

- 293

321 What is the Billing Unit

322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units

323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to

extract the information

324 To which system object is the BU assigned

351 TCRM20

- 296

325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document

326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system

Object is it defined

327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat

328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination

329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on

another document

330 What is the Billing Relevance

331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process

332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process

333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On

what is it based

352 TCRM20

- 298

334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the

ERP

335 How is it customized on the system

336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document

353 TCRM20

- 299

337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20

- 300

338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 302

339 What are the Middleware Objectives

340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his

features

341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW

connection in order to communicate with the CRM

374

375

TCRM20

- 321

342 What is the SMQ12

343 What is the TRFC

344 How the Queues are processed

345 What is the Scheduler

TCRM20

- 321

346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20

- 326

347 Where is the MW software installed

348 What is included in the CRM Server

349 What are the MW objectives (3)

TCRM20

- 327

350 Which technology runs the process 376

351 What is the Objective of the BDoc

352 What is a BDoc Type

353 What is a BDoc Instance

354 What is a BDoc message

355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc

377

378

TCRM20

- 350

356 Describe the out bounding Process

357 Describe the Inbounding Process

358 What is the use of the Queue

359 What is the administration console

360 What is the validation process

379

361 What is the Objective of the Object management

362 What is the use

363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs

380

364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and

what are the data transfer restrictions

365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and

the CRM

381

366 What is the objective of the data load

367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load

368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)

369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO

370 What is the delta Load

382

371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383

372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20

- 347

373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20

- 348

374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

responsibility of the Administration Console

375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc

376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc

377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc

386

378 What is the Data Integrity Manager

379 What is its use

387

380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and

relation between systems (6)

388

381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc

382 What are the options for debugging

391

383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the

SAP GUI

408

384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client

385 Which configuration tools are there

409

386 What are the different Business Roles (7)

387 Where are they defined

410

388 What are the different areas on the Screen

389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective

TCRM20

- 569

390 What is personalize

391 What is Help Center

392 What is System News

393 What is Central Search

TCRM20

- 570

394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20

- 571

395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles

396 To Which System Element we assign a User

411

397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412

398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR

399 What determines what will on the NB

413

400 What is the use of the Work Center

401 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 572

402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20

- 573

403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage

404 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 574

405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20

- 575

406 What is the use of the Calendar

407 What are the configuration options

TCRM20

- 576

408 Which system could be synched with the Email application

409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding

the Emails

410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which

logical links are there (4)

414 TCRM20

- 578

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center

412 What determines the Work Center

413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the

different between them

414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports

TCRM20

- 579

415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20

- 580

416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20

- 581

417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20

- 586

418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20

- 587

419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)

420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the

assignment block (4)

TCRM20

- 588

421 What is the second view possibility on the UI

422 For what is it used

423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view

424 Who may use this view

TCRM20

- 589

425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20

- 590

426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)

427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display

428 Give examples for Hierarchies

TCRM20

- 591

429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415

430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417

431 What is the role configuration key

432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key

419

433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench

434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed

by the EEWB

435 What is the user application of the EEWB

436 What is the advantage of the EEWB

437 What is the influence on other systems

421

438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422

439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20

- 613

440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each

441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user

442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model

TCRM20

- 615

443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)

444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links

445 What are the customization options of the NB profile

TCRM20

- 617

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

446 Where is the customization done

447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of

links

448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers

449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR

TCRM20

- 619

450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20

- 620

451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)

452 Where is it customized

TCRM20

- 622

453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are

they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the

influence of the layout profile on these links

TCRM20

- 623

454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples

455 Which types of function profile are there (4)

456 What determines the type of the functional profile

457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of

functional profile is it

TCRM20

- 624

458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR

459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org

unit position and user

TCRM20

- 626

460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20

- 627

461 What is the portal integration

462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the

CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal

TCRM20

- 629

463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20

- 636

464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system

465 Which authorization parameters are there

466 Where is the authorization profile defined

467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles

468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding

authorization

`

469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization

profile

TCRM20

- 641

470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role

(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)

TCRM20

- 648

471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links

472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links

473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link

474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role

475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role

476 What are the types of the WCLL

TCRM20

- 653

477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 655

478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)

479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs

480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the

different between them

TCRM20

- 669 ndash

673

481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view

the BTr Where is it defined

TCRM20

- 674

482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers

What purpose does it serve

483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based

484 What is BOL

485 What is a Genil What is its role

TCRM20

- 689

486 What is UI Component TCRM20

- 692

487 What is the model of the BSP

488 What the view of the BSP

489 What is the Controller of the BSP

TCRM20

- 694

490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the

concept

TCRM20

- 695

491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes

492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL

TCRM20

- 696

493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20

- 697

494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed

495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data

handling)

TCRM20

- 709

496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape

object it refers

497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users

TCRM20

- 732

498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key

role (5)

TCRM20

- 735

499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20

- 737

500 What is the role of the design layer

501 What is the purpose of the design layer

502 Where the design layer is logical positioned

503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are

linked to it

TCRM20

- 757

504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it

505 What is an Assignment

506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet

TCRM20

- 766

507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20

- 785

508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786

510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the

different elements

511 What are the processing restrictions

TCRM20

- 787

512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the

EEW What is the difference when creating a new table

TCRM20

- 788

513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different

between the EEW

514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)

TCRM20

- 812

515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and

which

TCRM20

- 812

516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW

517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI

518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are

not

TCRM20

- 821

519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW

when initiating a change

TCRM20

- 829

520 What is a component

521 What is the component enhancement concept

522 How does it work

523 What are the process elements when creating a new component

TCRM20

- 830

524

Question Page on

TCR

1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to

the SAP

2 What four other added values the system provides

TCRM10 -

26

3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)

4 What is the logic relation between them

5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)

TCRM10 -

27

6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)

7 What is the logic relation between them

8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)

TCRM10 -

28

9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)

10 What is the logic relation between them

TCRM10 -

29

11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -

30

12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

(8) 37

13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture

14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)

TCRM10 -

44

15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of

updates tare there

16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which

component do it What is the purpose of the verification

TCRM10 -

46

17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange

18 What is the role of the adapters

19 What is the CRM Adapter

20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas

TCRM10 -

47

21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)

22 What are the different components on the Application (3)

23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each

TCRM10 -

52

24 What is the purpose of the IC

25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)

TCRM10 -

53

26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile

users (3)

TCRM10 -

54

27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -

55

28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -

61

29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -

63

30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the

integration

31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing

TCRM10 -

80

32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan

33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)

34 What are the sub elements of a MP

35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)

36 What are the campaign characters (4)

37 What are the sub elements of a campaign

TCRM10 -

81

38 What is the meaning of segmentation

39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data

resources for each

40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers

41 What is the use of the attribute list

TCRM10 -

86

42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -

88

43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

group method

44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom

89

45 What is the activity TCRM10 -

95

46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign

47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned

TCRM10 -

96

48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)

49 How does is works (4)

50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management

51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM

TCRM10 -

108

52 What is the Process of TPM

53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of

each

TCRM10 -

109

54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -

118

55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -

119

56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -

120

57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)

58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding

E Service (7) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

133

59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -

135

60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may

perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

140

61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -

141

62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)

63 What is PRM

64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to

achieve it efficient How

TCRM10 -

150

65 What is eh concept of the PCM

66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)

TCRM10 -

151

67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management

68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each

(6)

TCRM10 -

153

69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

157

70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158

72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -

170

73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the

Business Partner integrate

TCRM10 -

171

74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -

178

75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -

179

76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose

77 Which processes it follows

78 What are its attributes (3)

TCRM10 -

188

79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -

189

80 What is the purpose of the activity Management

81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System

TCRM10 -

193

82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -

194

83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -

195

84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -

199

85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -

200

86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales

Methodology (4)

TCRM10 -

201

87 What are the initials PPM

88 What is the purpose of the tool

89 Who uses it and how (2)

TCRM10 -

201

90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -

207

91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -

208

92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to

maintain contracts

93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)

94 What is the relation between the contract and the order

TCRM10 -

218

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order

96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -

219

97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts

regarding work processes and updates (4)

TCRM10 -

220

98 What is the ICM What is his use

99 What are its business goals (3)

100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results

TCRM10 -

225

101 What are the main roles in an IC

102 What is the scratch pad

103 What is the Account info

104 What is the Alert

105 What is the Communication Information

106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers

107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system

TCRM10 -

231

108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM

109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)

TCRM10 -

232

110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be

integrated

TCRM10 -

233

111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -

234

112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the

knowledge search What are the results

TCRM10 -

235

113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)

114 What is an Interactive scripting

115 What is ERMS

116 What is the IDI

TCRM10 -

247

117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how

(3)

118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)

TCRM10 -

248

119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI

planned

120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting

121 What other IDI tools are there

TCRM10 -

249

122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of

creating a call list

TCRM10 -

250

123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)

124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)

TCRM10 -

251

125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -

257

126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 4: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

4 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

responsibilities

69 Which one is the mandatory Function

70 What is the main difference between the various org objects

71 What is the Marketing Functions on the organizational structure

72 What functions the Marketing organization allows us

73 What is its significance in compare with Sales and Services

88

74 What are the two methods to determine Organizational data to a

transaction

91

75 How does the system locate data and from where for realizing a

Transaction

76 Which two Kinds of rules guide the system when determining the data for

Transactions

77 Why is it required to determine certain rules to certain transactions

92

78 What is the system process flow of the Organizational data determination

79 What is the sequence of configuration flow of the Organizational data

determination

95

80 What are the product types in the CRM system (6)

81 What kinds of product data can be transferred from the ERP to the CRM

82 What is the reason that the data cannot be changed

111 TCRM10

ndash 481

83 What option is there to changes unchangeable product data on the CRM

system that sourced from the ERP

84 What is the sequence of creating a product on the ERP and transferring it to

the CRM and which system middle is required

113 TCRM10

- 482

85 What is the objective of the relationship

86 What are Accessories Customers products Vendors products Service

Products Spare part product Component products Warranties

87 Which system condition should be maintained in order to set the relationship

type

114 TCRM10

- 482

88 What are the Objectives of a Competitor Product

89 What is the use of the competitor product

90 What kind of Product type is a Competitor Product

91 Which transaction can use the competitor product

115 TCRM10

-484

92 What is the hierarchy of product definition

93 What is the definition and purpose of a Set Type

94 What are the Set Type elements

95 Which kind of set types has the product master and what each one

contains

116 TCRM10

- 490

96 What is the basic Set Type definition and Hierarchies for a product on the

CRM System

97 What is the sequence of transferring product from the ERP to the CRM

98 What is the requirement for Material product that was transferred from the

ERP

99 What is the significance of assigning a product to the product type

100 What is the difference between the hierarchy assignment to the different

product types in the CRM system And why

117

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

5 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

101 What is the different type of service products

102 What is the Warranty product and which kind of warranty product there

are

118 TCRM10

- 492

103 What is the objective on an Attribute

104 What are the parameters that define Attribute

105 What are the Objective of Set types

106 Which options are there for Set types uses

107 What is the set type restriction

108 Which Object is assigned to another

109 What are the mini templates

119 TCRM10

- 493

110 What enables the Product Category

111 What is the Objective of Product Category

112 Describe the logic behind the structure of Hierarchies and Product

Category and set type What is the role of the set type

120 TCRM10

ndash 493

113 What are the various elements necessary to enhance a Product 121 TCRM10

ndash 493

114 What is an Adapter Object

115 What is the two required downloads when replicating data from the ERP

to the CRM

122 TCRM10

- 493

116 What are the Objectives (3) of a Transaction

117 What are the options between various transactions (3)

151 TCRM20

-1 ndash 17

118 What are the two different areas on a transaction and what is the

difference between them

119 What is the use of a BTr

120 What is the use of the BTr Type

121 What is the additional level that a sales BTr has Which check is

required to operate this level

152 TCRM20

-1 - 18

122 What is determined when a TrTy is set for a BTr What are the three

elements

123 Name a few of the Transactions Characteristics

124 What is the restriction when working with a BTr regarding follow ups

125 What is the objective of a TrTy

126 What are the Blocking Reasons Where is it defined

127 What is the use of the permission channels

153 TCRM20

ndash 19 - 51

128 What triggers the Item Category

129 What are the attributes determined by the Item Category

130 Which data and profiles are fixed on an Item Category and what

resembles these data For which type of information are they divided

131 Which data is then determined and what resembles these data

154 TCRM20

ndash 20-54

132 What is the Item Category Group Where is it defined

133 What is the sequence of the item category determination

134 What is the condition regarding the item category determination when

replicating information from the ERP to the CRM Why

155 TCRM20

- 54

135 How the system does determine the Item Category

136 What are the options for Item category determination aside from the

156 TCRM20

- 55

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

6 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

default ones

137 What are the two options to maintain Preceding and subsequent

Documents

138 What is necessary in order to carry them out

139 What is the restriction when performing a copy control for a Transaction

157 TCRM20

- 93

140 What is the objective Transaction History

141 What is the difference between different kinds of transactions

142 What does the Transaction History allow

143 What triggers the transaction History

158 TCRM20

ndash 95

144 What is the sequence of the copy control

145 In Which cases the Copy control is mandatory

146 What is the case with Service when performing copy control

159 TCRM20

- 97

147 What is linking a document subsequently

148 What is copied and what is not copied when linking a document

subsequently

149 What is updated when the subsequent link was done

150 Which profile is required in order to allow a subsequent link

160 TCRM20

- 98

151 What are the Basic Functions in a BTr and what is the objective and use

of each (profiles)

161 TCRM20

- 98

152 What are the notes Which kinds of notes the system offers

153 What are the notes features

154 To which SO can these notes be maintained

162 TCRM20

- 99

155 How looks the Hierarchy of the TDP

156 What is determined for the Text under the TDP

157 To which SO assign one the TDP

163 TCRM20

- 100

158 What is the Objective of the Date Management

159 In which cases the Date Management is usable

160 For which BTr the date management is used

161 What are the characteristics of the Date Management

162 According to which System Object the Date Management rule is

determined

164 TCRM20

- 102

163 What are Date Types

164 What are durations

165 What are the date rules

165 TCRM20

- 103

166 What is the objective of the status management and what is the use

167 What Kind of System Statuses are managed on the System

168 What are the User Status restriction regarding a BTr

169 What are the User Status options regarding a User

166 TCRM20

- 104

170 Which system Objects determine the status Profile

171 What is necessary to define and activate a status profile on the system

172 What is a status number

173 What is determined when a status profile is called Which another

system rule is then required

167 TCRM20

- 105

174 What is the Objective Incompleteness Check

175 What is the use of the Incompleteness Check

168 TCRM20

- 107

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

7 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

176 What is the hierarchy of the Incompleteness Process To which system

object is it assigned

177 What is the objective of the Change History What are the three

parameters

178 Where is the Change History defined

170 TCRM20

- 130

179 What is the Objective of the activity

180 What kinds of Activities are there in the System

181 What characterizes an Activity What is the difference from other BTr

(3)

182 What are the two leading Business Transactions Categories for activities

that are defined in the System What is the difference between them

183 What is the relation between activities and other BTr

217 TCRM20

- 131

184 What is the Business Activity Structure And what is included

185 What is the relation between the activity Category and the Transaction

Type

218

186 What is included under the default data on the activity TrTy

187 What is required in order to add product to activities

219 TCRM20

- 136

188 What are the options for Follow-up Activities on the System What is the

difference between them

220 TCRM20

- 137

189 What are the characteristics of a questionnaire 221 TCRM20

- 137

190 What is the main purpose of the Activity Journal

191 What is the use of the Journal Activity

192 What is required in order to track Products

193 What is the relation with other TrTy

222 TCRM20

- 140

194 What is the objective of the connection between the CRM System and

the groupware

195 What is the use of the groupware application

196 What is required when defining the groupware

197 What are the system requirements for operating the groupware

223 TCRM20

- 142

198 What are the Objects that could be transferred between the CRM and a

Groupware System

199 Which Technology Elements are used to execute this option What

components are required

224 TCRM20

- 144

200 What is the activity analysis

201 What is necessary in order to be able to create reports

225

202 What is the objective of the PP

203 What is the use of the PP (5)

204 What are the most important sources of information are in the PP

243 TCRM20

- 168

205 What triggers the PP

206 What is the process sequence of the PP

244 TCRM20

- 169

207 What are the four principles of the PP (for data entering for document

for process)

245 TCRM20

- 171

208 What is the Partner Function Category 246 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

8 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

209 What is the Partner Function

210 What is the Partner Determination Procedure

211 What is the Access Sequence

- 176

212 What is the customizing restriction regarding the assignment of a Partner

Function What are the Hierarchy and Relation between the Partner

Function Category and the Partner Function

213 What is the Relationship Category What is the Relation between the

Partner Function Category and the Relationship Category What is the

connection to the Access sequence

214 What is the use of the Lock

215 What is the Undefined Partner

247 TCRM20

- 178

216 What is the Objective of the PDP

217 What is the use of the PDP

218 Which main data sources are used by the PDP

219 What type of data the PDP brings

220 Which data is determined in the PDP (4)

221 Which PDP parameters are defined (2)

222 To what we assign the Partner Determination Procedure

248 TCRM20

- 179

223 What is the Objective of the Access Sequence

224 What is the Use of the Access Sequence For which objects is it

referring

225 What is the option when no Access Sequence is determined

249 TCRM20

- 180

226 What is the order of events of data determination when processing a

process in the system

227 What are the parameters checked by the AS

228 Which customizing condition regarding the system process is required in

order to relate a PDP to a TrTy

229 What happens when a BP is determined on the PDP but no AS is

assigned to him

250 TCRM20

- 181

230 What is the purpose of actions on the System

231 What is the use of actions on the System

232 What is the terminology for the actions processing

273 TCRM20

- 207

233 What is the sequence of events for executing an action

234 To which System Element the Action Profile is assigned

235 What is the purpose of an Action Profile

236 Which Parameters are determined in the Action Profile regarding the

execution of actions

274 TCRM20

- 208

237 What is the Start Condition and the Schedule Condition on the System

and what is the relation between them

238 For which SO are the conditions assigned

239 What are the two mode of defining them

275 TCRM20

- 209

240 What is the purpose of the Processing Time

241 What kind of Processing Time the System allows and what is the

difference between them (3) Give examples for each

242 To which System Object do we assign the Processing Time

276 TCRM20

- 210

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

9 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

243 Where can we view the assigned actions What parameters are shown

244 What are the Processing types in the System and what is the purpose of

each one

277 TCRM20

- 211

245 What is the Hierarchy of the Action Profile definition

246 What are the parameters of the action profile and which characters has

each

247 What is the relation between a Transaction type and the Action Profile

278 TCRM20

- 212

248 What is the sequence of event when for an action profile to go in active 279 TCRM20

- 213

249 What is a Smart Form How does it work

250 Which kind of examples of activities documentation could be designed on

the SAP Smart Form

281 TCRM20

- 215

251 What is the purpose of the Action Monitor

252 Where is it originated

253 What is the use of the action monitor

254 What is the relation between the action monitor and the selection report

282 TCRM20

- 215

255 What is the responsible component for the Pricing in the CRM System

On which technology is it based

256 Which Pricing elements are included in the IPC From where comes the

relevant data (4 ndash sales product tax)

257 What is the use of the PP

258 On which SAP applications can the IPC be used What are the pricing

possibilities with it

259 What are the limitations of transferring pricing data from the ERP to the

CRM And why httphelpsapcomerp2005_ehp_04helpdataEN352cd77bd7705394e10000009b387c12framesethtm

305 TCRM20

- 243

260 What are the two Implementation Scenarios for the IPC and what is the

difference between them

306 TCRM20

- 244

261 What is the logic structure of the PP

262 On which parameters does the PP influence the Condition types (5 ndash the

use calculation )

307 TCRM20

- 245

263 Which System Objects and Data sources determine the Pricing

Procedure (5)

308 TCRM20

- 246

264 What is the Objective of the Con Ty On which system Object is it

operative

265 What are the characteristics of the Cond Ty

309 TCRM20

- 248

266 What is the objective of the Sequence Access

267 What is the Hierarchy between the AS and the Con Ty

268 Where is it used on the System What is the sequence of events when a

Con Is operated

269 What is a condition record

310 TCRM20

- 249

270 What is the Condition Tables

271 How does the condition Table is activated

272 What is the main restriction regarding the condition table

311 TCRM20

- 250

273 What is the Sequence of events during the Pricing Procedure 312 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

10 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

274 Which Condition techniques are already determined in the System - 251

275 What is the role of the Condition Records on the Pricing Procedure

276 What is the sequence of events of the condition record in the process of

pricing How does a Condition Record calculate the result What other

possibilities are

277 What is the Value scale

313 TCRM20

- 255

278 To which System Object could Conditions be maintained 314 TCRM20

- 256

279 What is included under the Condition Group 315

280 What is the Price Analysis

281 What is the use

282 When is it possible to use it

316 TCRM20

- 257

283 Which different function and uses (other than the regular pricing used on

a BTr) has the Pricing Process

284 What are the restrictions of pricing procedures on CRM

317 TCRM20

- 258

285 What are the different data sources for the Tax Determination

286 How is the Sequence of the tax determination Which component

performs the calculation Which other Data Bases are involved What is the

Output

287 Which CRM Pricing Procedure is recommended for using the TTE

318 TCRM20

- 259

288 What is the hierarchical structure of the FI on the ECC Which

indentifies has each unit (3)

289 What does the hierarchical structure allow

290 What are the two main business scenarios of the CRM Billing 340 TCRM20

- 284

291 What is the process flow of Service Cycle with the Billing 341

292 What is the process flow of sale Cycle with the Billing 342

293 What is the logic Process between the ECC and the CRM regarding the

billing

294 What are the BTrs that use the Billing Doc (5 - sales and service)

295 How can two different business scenarios be integrated into one Billing

Doc

296 Which FI components must be installed and where in order to integrate

the financial Control on the Billing Docs

297 What is the CRM Billing Application

343 TCRM20

- 285

298 What are the main stages on the Billing Process What is included under

inputs Outputs

299 What is the option of integrating information from external systems into

the Billing due List

300 What other options are there by the billing docs

344

301 What are the features of the input processing 345

302 What are the 4 billing methods

303 What is a billing document spilt

304 What is a billing document merge

346 TCRM20

- 289

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc

306 What are the data sources used during the billing process

307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What

is included in each part and what are its parameters

308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding

Billing Documents

309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed

310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc

347 TCRM20

- 291

311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System

and on which cases do you use each one

312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process

348

313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the

use of each

314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool

is used for this purpose

315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting

349 TCRM20

- 292

316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan

317 Which kinds of billing plans are there

318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of

319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan

320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned

350 TCRM20

- 293

321 What is the Billing Unit

322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units

323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to

extract the information

324 To which system object is the BU assigned

351 TCRM20

- 296

325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document

326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system

Object is it defined

327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat

328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination

329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on

another document

330 What is the Billing Relevance

331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process

332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process

333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On

what is it based

352 TCRM20

- 298

334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the

ERP

335 How is it customized on the system

336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document

353 TCRM20

- 299

337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20

- 300

338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 302

339 What are the Middleware Objectives

340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his

features

341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW

connection in order to communicate with the CRM

374

375

TCRM20

- 321

342 What is the SMQ12

343 What is the TRFC

344 How the Queues are processed

345 What is the Scheduler

TCRM20

- 321

346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20

- 326

347 Where is the MW software installed

348 What is included in the CRM Server

349 What are the MW objectives (3)

TCRM20

- 327

350 Which technology runs the process 376

351 What is the Objective of the BDoc

352 What is a BDoc Type

353 What is a BDoc Instance

354 What is a BDoc message

355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc

377

378

TCRM20

- 350

356 Describe the out bounding Process

357 Describe the Inbounding Process

358 What is the use of the Queue

359 What is the administration console

360 What is the validation process

379

361 What is the Objective of the Object management

362 What is the use

363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs

380

364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and

what are the data transfer restrictions

365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and

the CRM

381

366 What is the objective of the data load

367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load

368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)

369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO

370 What is the delta Load

382

371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383

372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20

- 347

373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20

- 348

374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

responsibility of the Administration Console

375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc

376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc

377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc

386

378 What is the Data Integrity Manager

379 What is its use

387

380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and

relation between systems (6)

388

381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc

382 What are the options for debugging

391

383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the

SAP GUI

408

384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client

385 Which configuration tools are there

409

386 What are the different Business Roles (7)

387 Where are they defined

410

388 What are the different areas on the Screen

389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective

TCRM20

- 569

390 What is personalize

391 What is Help Center

392 What is System News

393 What is Central Search

TCRM20

- 570

394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20

- 571

395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles

396 To Which System Element we assign a User

411

397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412

398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR

399 What determines what will on the NB

413

400 What is the use of the Work Center

401 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 572

402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20

- 573

403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage

404 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 574

405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20

- 575

406 What is the use of the Calendar

407 What are the configuration options

TCRM20

- 576

408 Which system could be synched with the Email application

409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding

the Emails

410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which

logical links are there (4)

414 TCRM20

- 578

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center

412 What determines the Work Center

413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the

different between them

414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports

TCRM20

- 579

415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20

- 580

416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20

- 581

417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20

- 586

418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20

- 587

419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)

420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the

assignment block (4)

TCRM20

- 588

421 What is the second view possibility on the UI

422 For what is it used

423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view

424 Who may use this view

TCRM20

- 589

425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20

- 590

426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)

427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display

428 Give examples for Hierarchies

TCRM20

- 591

429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415

430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417

431 What is the role configuration key

432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key

419

433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench

434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed

by the EEWB

435 What is the user application of the EEWB

436 What is the advantage of the EEWB

437 What is the influence on other systems

421

438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422

439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20

- 613

440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each

441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user

442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model

TCRM20

- 615

443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)

444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links

445 What are the customization options of the NB profile

TCRM20

- 617

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

446 Where is the customization done

447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of

links

448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers

449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR

TCRM20

- 619

450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20

- 620

451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)

452 Where is it customized

TCRM20

- 622

453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are

they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the

influence of the layout profile on these links

TCRM20

- 623

454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples

455 Which types of function profile are there (4)

456 What determines the type of the functional profile

457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of

functional profile is it

TCRM20

- 624

458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR

459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org

unit position and user

TCRM20

- 626

460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20

- 627

461 What is the portal integration

462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the

CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal

TCRM20

- 629

463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20

- 636

464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system

465 Which authorization parameters are there

466 Where is the authorization profile defined

467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles

468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding

authorization

`

469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization

profile

TCRM20

- 641

470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role

(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)

TCRM20

- 648

471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links

472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links

473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link

474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role

475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role

476 What are the types of the WCLL

TCRM20

- 653

477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 655

478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)

479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs

480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the

different between them

TCRM20

- 669 ndash

673

481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view

the BTr Where is it defined

TCRM20

- 674

482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers

What purpose does it serve

483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based

484 What is BOL

485 What is a Genil What is its role

TCRM20

- 689

486 What is UI Component TCRM20

- 692

487 What is the model of the BSP

488 What the view of the BSP

489 What is the Controller of the BSP

TCRM20

- 694

490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the

concept

TCRM20

- 695

491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes

492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL

TCRM20

- 696

493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20

- 697

494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed

495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data

handling)

TCRM20

- 709

496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape

object it refers

497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users

TCRM20

- 732

498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key

role (5)

TCRM20

- 735

499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20

- 737

500 What is the role of the design layer

501 What is the purpose of the design layer

502 Where the design layer is logical positioned

503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are

linked to it

TCRM20

- 757

504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it

505 What is an Assignment

506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet

TCRM20

- 766

507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20

- 785

508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786

510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the

different elements

511 What are the processing restrictions

TCRM20

- 787

512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the

EEW What is the difference when creating a new table

TCRM20

- 788

513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different

between the EEW

514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)

TCRM20

- 812

515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and

which

TCRM20

- 812

516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW

517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI

518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are

not

TCRM20

- 821

519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW

when initiating a change

TCRM20

- 829

520 What is a component

521 What is the component enhancement concept

522 How does it work

523 What are the process elements when creating a new component

TCRM20

- 830

524

Question Page on

TCR

1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to

the SAP

2 What four other added values the system provides

TCRM10 -

26

3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)

4 What is the logic relation between them

5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)

TCRM10 -

27

6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)

7 What is the logic relation between them

8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)

TCRM10 -

28

9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)

10 What is the logic relation between them

TCRM10 -

29

11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -

30

12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

(8) 37

13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture

14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)

TCRM10 -

44

15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of

updates tare there

16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which

component do it What is the purpose of the verification

TCRM10 -

46

17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange

18 What is the role of the adapters

19 What is the CRM Adapter

20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas

TCRM10 -

47

21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)

22 What are the different components on the Application (3)

23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each

TCRM10 -

52

24 What is the purpose of the IC

25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)

TCRM10 -

53

26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile

users (3)

TCRM10 -

54

27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -

55

28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -

61

29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -

63

30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the

integration

31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing

TCRM10 -

80

32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan

33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)

34 What are the sub elements of a MP

35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)

36 What are the campaign characters (4)

37 What are the sub elements of a campaign

TCRM10 -

81

38 What is the meaning of segmentation

39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data

resources for each

40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers

41 What is the use of the attribute list

TCRM10 -

86

42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -

88

43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

group method

44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom

89

45 What is the activity TCRM10 -

95

46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign

47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned

TCRM10 -

96

48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)

49 How does is works (4)

50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management

51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM

TCRM10 -

108

52 What is the Process of TPM

53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of

each

TCRM10 -

109

54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -

118

55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -

119

56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -

120

57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)

58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding

E Service (7) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

133

59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -

135

60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may

perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

140

61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -

141

62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)

63 What is PRM

64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to

achieve it efficient How

TCRM10 -

150

65 What is eh concept of the PCM

66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)

TCRM10 -

151

67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management

68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each

(6)

TCRM10 -

153

69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

157

70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158

72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -

170

73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the

Business Partner integrate

TCRM10 -

171

74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -

178

75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -

179

76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose

77 Which processes it follows

78 What are its attributes (3)

TCRM10 -

188

79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -

189

80 What is the purpose of the activity Management

81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System

TCRM10 -

193

82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -

194

83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -

195

84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -

199

85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -

200

86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales

Methodology (4)

TCRM10 -

201

87 What are the initials PPM

88 What is the purpose of the tool

89 Who uses it and how (2)

TCRM10 -

201

90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -

207

91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -

208

92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to

maintain contracts

93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)

94 What is the relation between the contract and the order

TCRM10 -

218

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order

96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -

219

97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts

regarding work processes and updates (4)

TCRM10 -

220

98 What is the ICM What is his use

99 What are its business goals (3)

100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results

TCRM10 -

225

101 What are the main roles in an IC

102 What is the scratch pad

103 What is the Account info

104 What is the Alert

105 What is the Communication Information

106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers

107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system

TCRM10 -

231

108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM

109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)

TCRM10 -

232

110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be

integrated

TCRM10 -

233

111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -

234

112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the

knowledge search What are the results

TCRM10 -

235

113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)

114 What is an Interactive scripting

115 What is ERMS

116 What is the IDI

TCRM10 -

247

117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how

(3)

118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)

TCRM10 -

248

119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI

planned

120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting

121 What other IDI tools are there

TCRM10 -

249

122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of

creating a call list

TCRM10 -

250

123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)

124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)

TCRM10 -

251

125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -

257

126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 5: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

5 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

101 What is the different type of service products

102 What is the Warranty product and which kind of warranty product there

are

118 TCRM10

- 492

103 What is the objective on an Attribute

104 What are the parameters that define Attribute

105 What are the Objective of Set types

106 Which options are there for Set types uses

107 What is the set type restriction

108 Which Object is assigned to another

109 What are the mini templates

119 TCRM10

- 493

110 What enables the Product Category

111 What is the Objective of Product Category

112 Describe the logic behind the structure of Hierarchies and Product

Category and set type What is the role of the set type

120 TCRM10

ndash 493

113 What are the various elements necessary to enhance a Product 121 TCRM10

ndash 493

114 What is an Adapter Object

115 What is the two required downloads when replicating data from the ERP

to the CRM

122 TCRM10

- 493

116 What are the Objectives (3) of a Transaction

117 What are the options between various transactions (3)

151 TCRM20

-1 ndash 17

118 What are the two different areas on a transaction and what is the

difference between them

119 What is the use of a BTr

120 What is the use of the BTr Type

121 What is the additional level that a sales BTr has Which check is

required to operate this level

152 TCRM20

-1 - 18

122 What is determined when a TrTy is set for a BTr What are the three

elements

123 Name a few of the Transactions Characteristics

124 What is the restriction when working with a BTr regarding follow ups

125 What is the objective of a TrTy

126 What are the Blocking Reasons Where is it defined

127 What is the use of the permission channels

153 TCRM20

ndash 19 - 51

128 What triggers the Item Category

129 What are the attributes determined by the Item Category

130 Which data and profiles are fixed on an Item Category and what

resembles these data For which type of information are they divided

131 Which data is then determined and what resembles these data

154 TCRM20

ndash 20-54

132 What is the Item Category Group Where is it defined

133 What is the sequence of the item category determination

134 What is the condition regarding the item category determination when

replicating information from the ERP to the CRM Why

155 TCRM20

- 54

135 How the system does determine the Item Category

136 What are the options for Item category determination aside from the

156 TCRM20

- 55

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

6 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

default ones

137 What are the two options to maintain Preceding and subsequent

Documents

138 What is necessary in order to carry them out

139 What is the restriction when performing a copy control for a Transaction

157 TCRM20

- 93

140 What is the objective Transaction History

141 What is the difference between different kinds of transactions

142 What does the Transaction History allow

143 What triggers the transaction History

158 TCRM20

ndash 95

144 What is the sequence of the copy control

145 In Which cases the Copy control is mandatory

146 What is the case with Service when performing copy control

159 TCRM20

- 97

147 What is linking a document subsequently

148 What is copied and what is not copied when linking a document

subsequently

149 What is updated when the subsequent link was done

150 Which profile is required in order to allow a subsequent link

160 TCRM20

- 98

151 What are the Basic Functions in a BTr and what is the objective and use

of each (profiles)

161 TCRM20

- 98

152 What are the notes Which kinds of notes the system offers

153 What are the notes features

154 To which SO can these notes be maintained

162 TCRM20

- 99

155 How looks the Hierarchy of the TDP

156 What is determined for the Text under the TDP

157 To which SO assign one the TDP

163 TCRM20

- 100

158 What is the Objective of the Date Management

159 In which cases the Date Management is usable

160 For which BTr the date management is used

161 What are the characteristics of the Date Management

162 According to which System Object the Date Management rule is

determined

164 TCRM20

- 102

163 What are Date Types

164 What are durations

165 What are the date rules

165 TCRM20

- 103

166 What is the objective of the status management and what is the use

167 What Kind of System Statuses are managed on the System

168 What are the User Status restriction regarding a BTr

169 What are the User Status options regarding a User

166 TCRM20

- 104

170 Which system Objects determine the status Profile

171 What is necessary to define and activate a status profile on the system

172 What is a status number

173 What is determined when a status profile is called Which another

system rule is then required

167 TCRM20

- 105

174 What is the Objective Incompleteness Check

175 What is the use of the Incompleteness Check

168 TCRM20

- 107

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

7 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

176 What is the hierarchy of the Incompleteness Process To which system

object is it assigned

177 What is the objective of the Change History What are the three

parameters

178 Where is the Change History defined

170 TCRM20

- 130

179 What is the Objective of the activity

180 What kinds of Activities are there in the System

181 What characterizes an Activity What is the difference from other BTr

(3)

182 What are the two leading Business Transactions Categories for activities

that are defined in the System What is the difference between them

183 What is the relation between activities and other BTr

217 TCRM20

- 131

184 What is the Business Activity Structure And what is included

185 What is the relation between the activity Category and the Transaction

Type

218

186 What is included under the default data on the activity TrTy

187 What is required in order to add product to activities

219 TCRM20

- 136

188 What are the options for Follow-up Activities on the System What is the

difference between them

220 TCRM20

- 137

189 What are the characteristics of a questionnaire 221 TCRM20

- 137

190 What is the main purpose of the Activity Journal

191 What is the use of the Journal Activity

192 What is required in order to track Products

193 What is the relation with other TrTy

222 TCRM20

- 140

194 What is the objective of the connection between the CRM System and

the groupware

195 What is the use of the groupware application

196 What is required when defining the groupware

197 What are the system requirements for operating the groupware

223 TCRM20

- 142

198 What are the Objects that could be transferred between the CRM and a

Groupware System

199 Which Technology Elements are used to execute this option What

components are required

224 TCRM20

- 144

200 What is the activity analysis

201 What is necessary in order to be able to create reports

225

202 What is the objective of the PP

203 What is the use of the PP (5)

204 What are the most important sources of information are in the PP

243 TCRM20

- 168

205 What triggers the PP

206 What is the process sequence of the PP

244 TCRM20

- 169

207 What are the four principles of the PP (for data entering for document

for process)

245 TCRM20

- 171

208 What is the Partner Function Category 246 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

8 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

209 What is the Partner Function

210 What is the Partner Determination Procedure

211 What is the Access Sequence

- 176

212 What is the customizing restriction regarding the assignment of a Partner

Function What are the Hierarchy and Relation between the Partner

Function Category and the Partner Function

213 What is the Relationship Category What is the Relation between the

Partner Function Category and the Relationship Category What is the

connection to the Access sequence

214 What is the use of the Lock

215 What is the Undefined Partner

247 TCRM20

- 178

216 What is the Objective of the PDP

217 What is the use of the PDP

218 Which main data sources are used by the PDP

219 What type of data the PDP brings

220 Which data is determined in the PDP (4)

221 Which PDP parameters are defined (2)

222 To what we assign the Partner Determination Procedure

248 TCRM20

- 179

223 What is the Objective of the Access Sequence

224 What is the Use of the Access Sequence For which objects is it

referring

225 What is the option when no Access Sequence is determined

249 TCRM20

- 180

226 What is the order of events of data determination when processing a

process in the system

227 What are the parameters checked by the AS

228 Which customizing condition regarding the system process is required in

order to relate a PDP to a TrTy

229 What happens when a BP is determined on the PDP but no AS is

assigned to him

250 TCRM20

- 181

230 What is the purpose of actions on the System

231 What is the use of actions on the System

232 What is the terminology for the actions processing

273 TCRM20

- 207

233 What is the sequence of events for executing an action

234 To which System Element the Action Profile is assigned

235 What is the purpose of an Action Profile

236 Which Parameters are determined in the Action Profile regarding the

execution of actions

274 TCRM20

- 208

237 What is the Start Condition and the Schedule Condition on the System

and what is the relation between them

238 For which SO are the conditions assigned

239 What are the two mode of defining them

275 TCRM20

- 209

240 What is the purpose of the Processing Time

241 What kind of Processing Time the System allows and what is the

difference between them (3) Give examples for each

242 To which System Object do we assign the Processing Time

276 TCRM20

- 210

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

9 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

243 Where can we view the assigned actions What parameters are shown

244 What are the Processing types in the System and what is the purpose of

each one

277 TCRM20

- 211

245 What is the Hierarchy of the Action Profile definition

246 What are the parameters of the action profile and which characters has

each

247 What is the relation between a Transaction type and the Action Profile

278 TCRM20

- 212

248 What is the sequence of event when for an action profile to go in active 279 TCRM20

- 213

249 What is a Smart Form How does it work

250 Which kind of examples of activities documentation could be designed on

the SAP Smart Form

281 TCRM20

- 215

251 What is the purpose of the Action Monitor

252 Where is it originated

253 What is the use of the action monitor

254 What is the relation between the action monitor and the selection report

282 TCRM20

- 215

255 What is the responsible component for the Pricing in the CRM System

On which technology is it based

256 Which Pricing elements are included in the IPC From where comes the

relevant data (4 ndash sales product tax)

257 What is the use of the PP

258 On which SAP applications can the IPC be used What are the pricing

possibilities with it

259 What are the limitations of transferring pricing data from the ERP to the

CRM And why httphelpsapcomerp2005_ehp_04helpdataEN352cd77bd7705394e10000009b387c12framesethtm

305 TCRM20

- 243

260 What are the two Implementation Scenarios for the IPC and what is the

difference between them

306 TCRM20

- 244

261 What is the logic structure of the PP

262 On which parameters does the PP influence the Condition types (5 ndash the

use calculation )

307 TCRM20

- 245

263 Which System Objects and Data sources determine the Pricing

Procedure (5)

308 TCRM20

- 246

264 What is the Objective of the Con Ty On which system Object is it

operative

265 What are the characteristics of the Cond Ty

309 TCRM20

- 248

266 What is the objective of the Sequence Access

267 What is the Hierarchy between the AS and the Con Ty

268 Where is it used on the System What is the sequence of events when a

Con Is operated

269 What is a condition record

310 TCRM20

- 249

270 What is the Condition Tables

271 How does the condition Table is activated

272 What is the main restriction regarding the condition table

311 TCRM20

- 250

273 What is the Sequence of events during the Pricing Procedure 312 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

10 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

274 Which Condition techniques are already determined in the System - 251

275 What is the role of the Condition Records on the Pricing Procedure

276 What is the sequence of events of the condition record in the process of

pricing How does a Condition Record calculate the result What other

possibilities are

277 What is the Value scale

313 TCRM20

- 255

278 To which System Object could Conditions be maintained 314 TCRM20

- 256

279 What is included under the Condition Group 315

280 What is the Price Analysis

281 What is the use

282 When is it possible to use it

316 TCRM20

- 257

283 Which different function and uses (other than the regular pricing used on

a BTr) has the Pricing Process

284 What are the restrictions of pricing procedures on CRM

317 TCRM20

- 258

285 What are the different data sources for the Tax Determination

286 How is the Sequence of the tax determination Which component

performs the calculation Which other Data Bases are involved What is the

Output

287 Which CRM Pricing Procedure is recommended for using the TTE

318 TCRM20

- 259

288 What is the hierarchical structure of the FI on the ECC Which

indentifies has each unit (3)

289 What does the hierarchical structure allow

290 What are the two main business scenarios of the CRM Billing 340 TCRM20

- 284

291 What is the process flow of Service Cycle with the Billing 341

292 What is the process flow of sale Cycle with the Billing 342

293 What is the logic Process between the ECC and the CRM regarding the

billing

294 What are the BTrs that use the Billing Doc (5 - sales and service)

295 How can two different business scenarios be integrated into one Billing

Doc

296 Which FI components must be installed and where in order to integrate

the financial Control on the Billing Docs

297 What is the CRM Billing Application

343 TCRM20

- 285

298 What are the main stages on the Billing Process What is included under

inputs Outputs

299 What is the option of integrating information from external systems into

the Billing due List

300 What other options are there by the billing docs

344

301 What are the features of the input processing 345

302 What are the 4 billing methods

303 What is a billing document spilt

304 What is a billing document merge

346 TCRM20

- 289

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc

306 What are the data sources used during the billing process

307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What

is included in each part and what are its parameters

308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding

Billing Documents

309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed

310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc

347 TCRM20

- 291

311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System

and on which cases do you use each one

312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process

348

313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the

use of each

314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool

is used for this purpose

315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting

349 TCRM20

- 292

316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan

317 Which kinds of billing plans are there

318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of

319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan

320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned

350 TCRM20

- 293

321 What is the Billing Unit

322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units

323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to

extract the information

324 To which system object is the BU assigned

351 TCRM20

- 296

325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document

326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system

Object is it defined

327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat

328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination

329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on

another document

330 What is the Billing Relevance

331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process

332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process

333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On

what is it based

352 TCRM20

- 298

334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the

ERP

335 How is it customized on the system

336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document

353 TCRM20

- 299

337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20

- 300

338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 302

339 What are the Middleware Objectives

340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his

features

341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW

connection in order to communicate with the CRM

374

375

TCRM20

- 321

342 What is the SMQ12

343 What is the TRFC

344 How the Queues are processed

345 What is the Scheduler

TCRM20

- 321

346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20

- 326

347 Where is the MW software installed

348 What is included in the CRM Server

349 What are the MW objectives (3)

TCRM20

- 327

350 Which technology runs the process 376

351 What is the Objective of the BDoc

352 What is a BDoc Type

353 What is a BDoc Instance

354 What is a BDoc message

355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc

377

378

TCRM20

- 350

356 Describe the out bounding Process

357 Describe the Inbounding Process

358 What is the use of the Queue

359 What is the administration console

360 What is the validation process

379

361 What is the Objective of the Object management

362 What is the use

363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs

380

364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and

what are the data transfer restrictions

365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and

the CRM

381

366 What is the objective of the data load

367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load

368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)

369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO

370 What is the delta Load

382

371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383

372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20

- 347

373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20

- 348

374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

responsibility of the Administration Console

375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc

376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc

377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc

386

378 What is the Data Integrity Manager

379 What is its use

387

380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and

relation between systems (6)

388

381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc

382 What are the options for debugging

391

383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the

SAP GUI

408

384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client

385 Which configuration tools are there

409

386 What are the different Business Roles (7)

387 Where are they defined

410

388 What are the different areas on the Screen

389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective

TCRM20

- 569

390 What is personalize

391 What is Help Center

392 What is System News

393 What is Central Search

TCRM20

- 570

394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20

- 571

395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles

396 To Which System Element we assign a User

411

397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412

398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR

399 What determines what will on the NB

413

400 What is the use of the Work Center

401 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 572

402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20

- 573

403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage

404 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 574

405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20

- 575

406 What is the use of the Calendar

407 What are the configuration options

TCRM20

- 576

408 Which system could be synched with the Email application

409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding

the Emails

410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which

logical links are there (4)

414 TCRM20

- 578

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center

412 What determines the Work Center

413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the

different between them

414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports

TCRM20

- 579

415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20

- 580

416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20

- 581

417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20

- 586

418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20

- 587

419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)

420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the

assignment block (4)

TCRM20

- 588

421 What is the second view possibility on the UI

422 For what is it used

423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view

424 Who may use this view

TCRM20

- 589

425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20

- 590

426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)

427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display

428 Give examples for Hierarchies

TCRM20

- 591

429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415

430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417

431 What is the role configuration key

432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key

419

433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench

434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed

by the EEWB

435 What is the user application of the EEWB

436 What is the advantage of the EEWB

437 What is the influence on other systems

421

438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422

439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20

- 613

440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each

441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user

442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model

TCRM20

- 615

443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)

444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links

445 What are the customization options of the NB profile

TCRM20

- 617

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

446 Where is the customization done

447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of

links

448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers

449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR

TCRM20

- 619

450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20

- 620

451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)

452 Where is it customized

TCRM20

- 622

453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are

they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the

influence of the layout profile on these links

TCRM20

- 623

454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples

455 Which types of function profile are there (4)

456 What determines the type of the functional profile

457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of

functional profile is it

TCRM20

- 624

458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR

459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org

unit position and user

TCRM20

- 626

460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20

- 627

461 What is the portal integration

462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the

CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal

TCRM20

- 629

463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20

- 636

464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system

465 Which authorization parameters are there

466 Where is the authorization profile defined

467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles

468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding

authorization

`

469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization

profile

TCRM20

- 641

470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role

(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)

TCRM20

- 648

471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links

472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links

473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link

474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role

475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role

476 What are the types of the WCLL

TCRM20

- 653

477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 655

478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)

479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs

480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the

different between them

TCRM20

- 669 ndash

673

481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view

the BTr Where is it defined

TCRM20

- 674

482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers

What purpose does it serve

483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based

484 What is BOL

485 What is a Genil What is its role

TCRM20

- 689

486 What is UI Component TCRM20

- 692

487 What is the model of the BSP

488 What the view of the BSP

489 What is the Controller of the BSP

TCRM20

- 694

490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the

concept

TCRM20

- 695

491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes

492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL

TCRM20

- 696

493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20

- 697

494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed

495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data

handling)

TCRM20

- 709

496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape

object it refers

497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users

TCRM20

- 732

498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key

role (5)

TCRM20

- 735

499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20

- 737

500 What is the role of the design layer

501 What is the purpose of the design layer

502 Where the design layer is logical positioned

503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are

linked to it

TCRM20

- 757

504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it

505 What is an Assignment

506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet

TCRM20

- 766

507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20

- 785

508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786

510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the

different elements

511 What are the processing restrictions

TCRM20

- 787

512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the

EEW What is the difference when creating a new table

TCRM20

- 788

513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different

between the EEW

514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)

TCRM20

- 812

515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and

which

TCRM20

- 812

516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW

517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI

518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are

not

TCRM20

- 821

519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW

when initiating a change

TCRM20

- 829

520 What is a component

521 What is the component enhancement concept

522 How does it work

523 What are the process elements when creating a new component

TCRM20

- 830

524

Question Page on

TCR

1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to

the SAP

2 What four other added values the system provides

TCRM10 -

26

3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)

4 What is the logic relation between them

5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)

TCRM10 -

27

6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)

7 What is the logic relation between them

8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)

TCRM10 -

28

9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)

10 What is the logic relation between them

TCRM10 -

29

11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -

30

12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

(8) 37

13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture

14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)

TCRM10 -

44

15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of

updates tare there

16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which

component do it What is the purpose of the verification

TCRM10 -

46

17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange

18 What is the role of the adapters

19 What is the CRM Adapter

20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas

TCRM10 -

47

21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)

22 What are the different components on the Application (3)

23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each

TCRM10 -

52

24 What is the purpose of the IC

25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)

TCRM10 -

53

26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile

users (3)

TCRM10 -

54

27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -

55

28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -

61

29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -

63

30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the

integration

31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing

TCRM10 -

80

32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan

33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)

34 What are the sub elements of a MP

35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)

36 What are the campaign characters (4)

37 What are the sub elements of a campaign

TCRM10 -

81

38 What is the meaning of segmentation

39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data

resources for each

40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers

41 What is the use of the attribute list

TCRM10 -

86

42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -

88

43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

group method

44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom

89

45 What is the activity TCRM10 -

95

46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign

47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned

TCRM10 -

96

48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)

49 How does is works (4)

50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management

51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM

TCRM10 -

108

52 What is the Process of TPM

53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of

each

TCRM10 -

109

54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -

118

55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -

119

56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -

120

57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)

58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding

E Service (7) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

133

59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -

135

60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may

perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

140

61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -

141

62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)

63 What is PRM

64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to

achieve it efficient How

TCRM10 -

150

65 What is eh concept of the PCM

66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)

TCRM10 -

151

67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management

68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each

(6)

TCRM10 -

153

69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

157

70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158

72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -

170

73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the

Business Partner integrate

TCRM10 -

171

74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -

178

75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -

179

76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose

77 Which processes it follows

78 What are its attributes (3)

TCRM10 -

188

79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -

189

80 What is the purpose of the activity Management

81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System

TCRM10 -

193

82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -

194

83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -

195

84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -

199

85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -

200

86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales

Methodology (4)

TCRM10 -

201

87 What are the initials PPM

88 What is the purpose of the tool

89 Who uses it and how (2)

TCRM10 -

201

90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -

207

91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -

208

92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to

maintain contracts

93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)

94 What is the relation between the contract and the order

TCRM10 -

218

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order

96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -

219

97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts

regarding work processes and updates (4)

TCRM10 -

220

98 What is the ICM What is his use

99 What are its business goals (3)

100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results

TCRM10 -

225

101 What are the main roles in an IC

102 What is the scratch pad

103 What is the Account info

104 What is the Alert

105 What is the Communication Information

106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers

107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system

TCRM10 -

231

108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM

109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)

TCRM10 -

232

110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be

integrated

TCRM10 -

233

111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -

234

112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the

knowledge search What are the results

TCRM10 -

235

113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)

114 What is an Interactive scripting

115 What is ERMS

116 What is the IDI

TCRM10 -

247

117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how

(3)

118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)

TCRM10 -

248

119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI

planned

120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting

121 What other IDI tools are there

TCRM10 -

249

122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of

creating a call list

TCRM10 -

250

123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)

124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)

TCRM10 -

251

125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -

257

126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 6: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

6 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

default ones

137 What are the two options to maintain Preceding and subsequent

Documents

138 What is necessary in order to carry them out

139 What is the restriction when performing a copy control for a Transaction

157 TCRM20

- 93

140 What is the objective Transaction History

141 What is the difference between different kinds of transactions

142 What does the Transaction History allow

143 What triggers the transaction History

158 TCRM20

ndash 95

144 What is the sequence of the copy control

145 In Which cases the Copy control is mandatory

146 What is the case with Service when performing copy control

159 TCRM20

- 97

147 What is linking a document subsequently

148 What is copied and what is not copied when linking a document

subsequently

149 What is updated when the subsequent link was done

150 Which profile is required in order to allow a subsequent link

160 TCRM20

- 98

151 What are the Basic Functions in a BTr and what is the objective and use

of each (profiles)

161 TCRM20

- 98

152 What are the notes Which kinds of notes the system offers

153 What are the notes features

154 To which SO can these notes be maintained

162 TCRM20

- 99

155 How looks the Hierarchy of the TDP

156 What is determined for the Text under the TDP

157 To which SO assign one the TDP

163 TCRM20

- 100

158 What is the Objective of the Date Management

159 In which cases the Date Management is usable

160 For which BTr the date management is used

161 What are the characteristics of the Date Management

162 According to which System Object the Date Management rule is

determined

164 TCRM20

- 102

163 What are Date Types

164 What are durations

165 What are the date rules

165 TCRM20

- 103

166 What is the objective of the status management and what is the use

167 What Kind of System Statuses are managed on the System

168 What are the User Status restriction regarding a BTr

169 What are the User Status options regarding a User

166 TCRM20

- 104

170 Which system Objects determine the status Profile

171 What is necessary to define and activate a status profile on the system

172 What is a status number

173 What is determined when a status profile is called Which another

system rule is then required

167 TCRM20

- 105

174 What is the Objective Incompleteness Check

175 What is the use of the Incompleteness Check

168 TCRM20

- 107

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

7 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

176 What is the hierarchy of the Incompleteness Process To which system

object is it assigned

177 What is the objective of the Change History What are the three

parameters

178 Where is the Change History defined

170 TCRM20

- 130

179 What is the Objective of the activity

180 What kinds of Activities are there in the System

181 What characterizes an Activity What is the difference from other BTr

(3)

182 What are the two leading Business Transactions Categories for activities

that are defined in the System What is the difference between them

183 What is the relation between activities and other BTr

217 TCRM20

- 131

184 What is the Business Activity Structure And what is included

185 What is the relation between the activity Category and the Transaction

Type

218

186 What is included under the default data on the activity TrTy

187 What is required in order to add product to activities

219 TCRM20

- 136

188 What are the options for Follow-up Activities on the System What is the

difference between them

220 TCRM20

- 137

189 What are the characteristics of a questionnaire 221 TCRM20

- 137

190 What is the main purpose of the Activity Journal

191 What is the use of the Journal Activity

192 What is required in order to track Products

193 What is the relation with other TrTy

222 TCRM20

- 140

194 What is the objective of the connection between the CRM System and

the groupware

195 What is the use of the groupware application

196 What is required when defining the groupware

197 What are the system requirements for operating the groupware

223 TCRM20

- 142

198 What are the Objects that could be transferred between the CRM and a

Groupware System

199 Which Technology Elements are used to execute this option What

components are required

224 TCRM20

- 144

200 What is the activity analysis

201 What is necessary in order to be able to create reports

225

202 What is the objective of the PP

203 What is the use of the PP (5)

204 What are the most important sources of information are in the PP

243 TCRM20

- 168

205 What triggers the PP

206 What is the process sequence of the PP

244 TCRM20

- 169

207 What are the four principles of the PP (for data entering for document

for process)

245 TCRM20

- 171

208 What is the Partner Function Category 246 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

8 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

209 What is the Partner Function

210 What is the Partner Determination Procedure

211 What is the Access Sequence

- 176

212 What is the customizing restriction regarding the assignment of a Partner

Function What are the Hierarchy and Relation between the Partner

Function Category and the Partner Function

213 What is the Relationship Category What is the Relation between the

Partner Function Category and the Relationship Category What is the

connection to the Access sequence

214 What is the use of the Lock

215 What is the Undefined Partner

247 TCRM20

- 178

216 What is the Objective of the PDP

217 What is the use of the PDP

218 Which main data sources are used by the PDP

219 What type of data the PDP brings

220 Which data is determined in the PDP (4)

221 Which PDP parameters are defined (2)

222 To what we assign the Partner Determination Procedure

248 TCRM20

- 179

223 What is the Objective of the Access Sequence

224 What is the Use of the Access Sequence For which objects is it

referring

225 What is the option when no Access Sequence is determined

249 TCRM20

- 180

226 What is the order of events of data determination when processing a

process in the system

227 What are the parameters checked by the AS

228 Which customizing condition regarding the system process is required in

order to relate a PDP to a TrTy

229 What happens when a BP is determined on the PDP but no AS is

assigned to him

250 TCRM20

- 181

230 What is the purpose of actions on the System

231 What is the use of actions on the System

232 What is the terminology for the actions processing

273 TCRM20

- 207

233 What is the sequence of events for executing an action

234 To which System Element the Action Profile is assigned

235 What is the purpose of an Action Profile

236 Which Parameters are determined in the Action Profile regarding the

execution of actions

274 TCRM20

- 208

237 What is the Start Condition and the Schedule Condition on the System

and what is the relation between them

238 For which SO are the conditions assigned

239 What are the two mode of defining them

275 TCRM20

- 209

240 What is the purpose of the Processing Time

241 What kind of Processing Time the System allows and what is the

difference between them (3) Give examples for each

242 To which System Object do we assign the Processing Time

276 TCRM20

- 210

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

9 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

243 Where can we view the assigned actions What parameters are shown

244 What are the Processing types in the System and what is the purpose of

each one

277 TCRM20

- 211

245 What is the Hierarchy of the Action Profile definition

246 What are the parameters of the action profile and which characters has

each

247 What is the relation between a Transaction type and the Action Profile

278 TCRM20

- 212

248 What is the sequence of event when for an action profile to go in active 279 TCRM20

- 213

249 What is a Smart Form How does it work

250 Which kind of examples of activities documentation could be designed on

the SAP Smart Form

281 TCRM20

- 215

251 What is the purpose of the Action Monitor

252 Where is it originated

253 What is the use of the action monitor

254 What is the relation between the action monitor and the selection report

282 TCRM20

- 215

255 What is the responsible component for the Pricing in the CRM System

On which technology is it based

256 Which Pricing elements are included in the IPC From where comes the

relevant data (4 ndash sales product tax)

257 What is the use of the PP

258 On which SAP applications can the IPC be used What are the pricing

possibilities with it

259 What are the limitations of transferring pricing data from the ERP to the

CRM And why httphelpsapcomerp2005_ehp_04helpdataEN352cd77bd7705394e10000009b387c12framesethtm

305 TCRM20

- 243

260 What are the two Implementation Scenarios for the IPC and what is the

difference between them

306 TCRM20

- 244

261 What is the logic structure of the PP

262 On which parameters does the PP influence the Condition types (5 ndash the

use calculation )

307 TCRM20

- 245

263 Which System Objects and Data sources determine the Pricing

Procedure (5)

308 TCRM20

- 246

264 What is the Objective of the Con Ty On which system Object is it

operative

265 What are the characteristics of the Cond Ty

309 TCRM20

- 248

266 What is the objective of the Sequence Access

267 What is the Hierarchy between the AS and the Con Ty

268 Where is it used on the System What is the sequence of events when a

Con Is operated

269 What is a condition record

310 TCRM20

- 249

270 What is the Condition Tables

271 How does the condition Table is activated

272 What is the main restriction regarding the condition table

311 TCRM20

- 250

273 What is the Sequence of events during the Pricing Procedure 312 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

10 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

274 Which Condition techniques are already determined in the System - 251

275 What is the role of the Condition Records on the Pricing Procedure

276 What is the sequence of events of the condition record in the process of

pricing How does a Condition Record calculate the result What other

possibilities are

277 What is the Value scale

313 TCRM20

- 255

278 To which System Object could Conditions be maintained 314 TCRM20

- 256

279 What is included under the Condition Group 315

280 What is the Price Analysis

281 What is the use

282 When is it possible to use it

316 TCRM20

- 257

283 Which different function and uses (other than the regular pricing used on

a BTr) has the Pricing Process

284 What are the restrictions of pricing procedures on CRM

317 TCRM20

- 258

285 What are the different data sources for the Tax Determination

286 How is the Sequence of the tax determination Which component

performs the calculation Which other Data Bases are involved What is the

Output

287 Which CRM Pricing Procedure is recommended for using the TTE

318 TCRM20

- 259

288 What is the hierarchical structure of the FI on the ECC Which

indentifies has each unit (3)

289 What does the hierarchical structure allow

290 What are the two main business scenarios of the CRM Billing 340 TCRM20

- 284

291 What is the process flow of Service Cycle with the Billing 341

292 What is the process flow of sale Cycle with the Billing 342

293 What is the logic Process between the ECC and the CRM regarding the

billing

294 What are the BTrs that use the Billing Doc (5 - sales and service)

295 How can two different business scenarios be integrated into one Billing

Doc

296 Which FI components must be installed and where in order to integrate

the financial Control on the Billing Docs

297 What is the CRM Billing Application

343 TCRM20

- 285

298 What are the main stages on the Billing Process What is included under

inputs Outputs

299 What is the option of integrating information from external systems into

the Billing due List

300 What other options are there by the billing docs

344

301 What are the features of the input processing 345

302 What are the 4 billing methods

303 What is a billing document spilt

304 What is a billing document merge

346 TCRM20

- 289

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc

306 What are the data sources used during the billing process

307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What

is included in each part and what are its parameters

308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding

Billing Documents

309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed

310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc

347 TCRM20

- 291

311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System

and on which cases do you use each one

312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process

348

313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the

use of each

314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool

is used for this purpose

315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting

349 TCRM20

- 292

316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan

317 Which kinds of billing plans are there

318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of

319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan

320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned

350 TCRM20

- 293

321 What is the Billing Unit

322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units

323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to

extract the information

324 To which system object is the BU assigned

351 TCRM20

- 296

325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document

326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system

Object is it defined

327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat

328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination

329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on

another document

330 What is the Billing Relevance

331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process

332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process

333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On

what is it based

352 TCRM20

- 298

334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the

ERP

335 How is it customized on the system

336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document

353 TCRM20

- 299

337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20

- 300

338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 302

339 What are the Middleware Objectives

340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his

features

341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW

connection in order to communicate with the CRM

374

375

TCRM20

- 321

342 What is the SMQ12

343 What is the TRFC

344 How the Queues are processed

345 What is the Scheduler

TCRM20

- 321

346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20

- 326

347 Where is the MW software installed

348 What is included in the CRM Server

349 What are the MW objectives (3)

TCRM20

- 327

350 Which technology runs the process 376

351 What is the Objective of the BDoc

352 What is a BDoc Type

353 What is a BDoc Instance

354 What is a BDoc message

355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc

377

378

TCRM20

- 350

356 Describe the out bounding Process

357 Describe the Inbounding Process

358 What is the use of the Queue

359 What is the administration console

360 What is the validation process

379

361 What is the Objective of the Object management

362 What is the use

363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs

380

364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and

what are the data transfer restrictions

365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and

the CRM

381

366 What is the objective of the data load

367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load

368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)

369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO

370 What is the delta Load

382

371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383

372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20

- 347

373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20

- 348

374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

responsibility of the Administration Console

375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc

376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc

377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc

386

378 What is the Data Integrity Manager

379 What is its use

387

380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and

relation between systems (6)

388

381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc

382 What are the options for debugging

391

383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the

SAP GUI

408

384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client

385 Which configuration tools are there

409

386 What are the different Business Roles (7)

387 Where are they defined

410

388 What are the different areas on the Screen

389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective

TCRM20

- 569

390 What is personalize

391 What is Help Center

392 What is System News

393 What is Central Search

TCRM20

- 570

394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20

- 571

395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles

396 To Which System Element we assign a User

411

397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412

398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR

399 What determines what will on the NB

413

400 What is the use of the Work Center

401 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 572

402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20

- 573

403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage

404 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 574

405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20

- 575

406 What is the use of the Calendar

407 What are the configuration options

TCRM20

- 576

408 Which system could be synched with the Email application

409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding

the Emails

410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which

logical links are there (4)

414 TCRM20

- 578

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center

412 What determines the Work Center

413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the

different between them

414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports

TCRM20

- 579

415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20

- 580

416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20

- 581

417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20

- 586

418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20

- 587

419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)

420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the

assignment block (4)

TCRM20

- 588

421 What is the second view possibility on the UI

422 For what is it used

423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view

424 Who may use this view

TCRM20

- 589

425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20

- 590

426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)

427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display

428 Give examples for Hierarchies

TCRM20

- 591

429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415

430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417

431 What is the role configuration key

432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key

419

433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench

434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed

by the EEWB

435 What is the user application of the EEWB

436 What is the advantage of the EEWB

437 What is the influence on other systems

421

438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422

439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20

- 613

440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each

441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user

442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model

TCRM20

- 615

443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)

444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links

445 What are the customization options of the NB profile

TCRM20

- 617

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

446 Where is the customization done

447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of

links

448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers

449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR

TCRM20

- 619

450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20

- 620

451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)

452 Where is it customized

TCRM20

- 622

453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are

they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the

influence of the layout profile on these links

TCRM20

- 623

454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples

455 Which types of function profile are there (4)

456 What determines the type of the functional profile

457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of

functional profile is it

TCRM20

- 624

458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR

459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org

unit position and user

TCRM20

- 626

460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20

- 627

461 What is the portal integration

462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the

CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal

TCRM20

- 629

463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20

- 636

464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system

465 Which authorization parameters are there

466 Where is the authorization profile defined

467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles

468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding

authorization

`

469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization

profile

TCRM20

- 641

470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role

(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)

TCRM20

- 648

471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links

472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links

473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link

474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role

475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role

476 What are the types of the WCLL

TCRM20

- 653

477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 655

478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)

479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs

480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the

different between them

TCRM20

- 669 ndash

673

481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view

the BTr Where is it defined

TCRM20

- 674

482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers

What purpose does it serve

483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based

484 What is BOL

485 What is a Genil What is its role

TCRM20

- 689

486 What is UI Component TCRM20

- 692

487 What is the model of the BSP

488 What the view of the BSP

489 What is the Controller of the BSP

TCRM20

- 694

490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the

concept

TCRM20

- 695

491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes

492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL

TCRM20

- 696

493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20

- 697

494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed

495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data

handling)

TCRM20

- 709

496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape

object it refers

497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users

TCRM20

- 732

498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key

role (5)

TCRM20

- 735

499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20

- 737

500 What is the role of the design layer

501 What is the purpose of the design layer

502 Where the design layer is logical positioned

503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are

linked to it

TCRM20

- 757

504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it

505 What is an Assignment

506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet

TCRM20

- 766

507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20

- 785

508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786

510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the

different elements

511 What are the processing restrictions

TCRM20

- 787

512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the

EEW What is the difference when creating a new table

TCRM20

- 788

513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different

between the EEW

514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)

TCRM20

- 812

515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and

which

TCRM20

- 812

516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW

517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI

518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are

not

TCRM20

- 821

519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW

when initiating a change

TCRM20

- 829

520 What is a component

521 What is the component enhancement concept

522 How does it work

523 What are the process elements when creating a new component

TCRM20

- 830

524

Question Page on

TCR

1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to

the SAP

2 What four other added values the system provides

TCRM10 -

26

3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)

4 What is the logic relation between them

5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)

TCRM10 -

27

6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)

7 What is the logic relation between them

8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)

TCRM10 -

28

9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)

10 What is the logic relation between them

TCRM10 -

29

11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -

30

12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

(8) 37

13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture

14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)

TCRM10 -

44

15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of

updates tare there

16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which

component do it What is the purpose of the verification

TCRM10 -

46

17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange

18 What is the role of the adapters

19 What is the CRM Adapter

20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas

TCRM10 -

47

21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)

22 What are the different components on the Application (3)

23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each

TCRM10 -

52

24 What is the purpose of the IC

25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)

TCRM10 -

53

26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile

users (3)

TCRM10 -

54

27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -

55

28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -

61

29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -

63

30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the

integration

31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing

TCRM10 -

80

32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan

33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)

34 What are the sub elements of a MP

35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)

36 What are the campaign characters (4)

37 What are the sub elements of a campaign

TCRM10 -

81

38 What is the meaning of segmentation

39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data

resources for each

40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers

41 What is the use of the attribute list

TCRM10 -

86

42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -

88

43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

group method

44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom

89

45 What is the activity TCRM10 -

95

46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign

47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned

TCRM10 -

96

48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)

49 How does is works (4)

50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management

51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM

TCRM10 -

108

52 What is the Process of TPM

53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of

each

TCRM10 -

109

54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -

118

55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -

119

56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -

120

57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)

58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding

E Service (7) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

133

59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -

135

60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may

perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

140

61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -

141

62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)

63 What is PRM

64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to

achieve it efficient How

TCRM10 -

150

65 What is eh concept of the PCM

66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)

TCRM10 -

151

67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management

68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each

(6)

TCRM10 -

153

69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

157

70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158

72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -

170

73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the

Business Partner integrate

TCRM10 -

171

74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -

178

75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -

179

76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose

77 Which processes it follows

78 What are its attributes (3)

TCRM10 -

188

79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -

189

80 What is the purpose of the activity Management

81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System

TCRM10 -

193

82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -

194

83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -

195

84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -

199

85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -

200

86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales

Methodology (4)

TCRM10 -

201

87 What are the initials PPM

88 What is the purpose of the tool

89 Who uses it and how (2)

TCRM10 -

201

90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -

207

91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -

208

92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to

maintain contracts

93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)

94 What is the relation between the contract and the order

TCRM10 -

218

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order

96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -

219

97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts

regarding work processes and updates (4)

TCRM10 -

220

98 What is the ICM What is his use

99 What are its business goals (3)

100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results

TCRM10 -

225

101 What are the main roles in an IC

102 What is the scratch pad

103 What is the Account info

104 What is the Alert

105 What is the Communication Information

106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers

107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system

TCRM10 -

231

108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM

109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)

TCRM10 -

232

110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be

integrated

TCRM10 -

233

111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -

234

112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the

knowledge search What are the results

TCRM10 -

235

113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)

114 What is an Interactive scripting

115 What is ERMS

116 What is the IDI

TCRM10 -

247

117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how

(3)

118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)

TCRM10 -

248

119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI

planned

120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting

121 What other IDI tools are there

TCRM10 -

249

122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of

creating a call list

TCRM10 -

250

123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)

124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)

TCRM10 -

251

125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -

257

126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 7: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

7 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

176 What is the hierarchy of the Incompleteness Process To which system

object is it assigned

177 What is the objective of the Change History What are the three

parameters

178 Where is the Change History defined

170 TCRM20

- 130

179 What is the Objective of the activity

180 What kinds of Activities are there in the System

181 What characterizes an Activity What is the difference from other BTr

(3)

182 What are the two leading Business Transactions Categories for activities

that are defined in the System What is the difference between them

183 What is the relation between activities and other BTr

217 TCRM20

- 131

184 What is the Business Activity Structure And what is included

185 What is the relation between the activity Category and the Transaction

Type

218

186 What is included under the default data on the activity TrTy

187 What is required in order to add product to activities

219 TCRM20

- 136

188 What are the options for Follow-up Activities on the System What is the

difference between them

220 TCRM20

- 137

189 What are the characteristics of a questionnaire 221 TCRM20

- 137

190 What is the main purpose of the Activity Journal

191 What is the use of the Journal Activity

192 What is required in order to track Products

193 What is the relation with other TrTy

222 TCRM20

- 140

194 What is the objective of the connection between the CRM System and

the groupware

195 What is the use of the groupware application

196 What is required when defining the groupware

197 What are the system requirements for operating the groupware

223 TCRM20

- 142

198 What are the Objects that could be transferred between the CRM and a

Groupware System

199 Which Technology Elements are used to execute this option What

components are required

224 TCRM20

- 144

200 What is the activity analysis

201 What is necessary in order to be able to create reports

225

202 What is the objective of the PP

203 What is the use of the PP (5)

204 What are the most important sources of information are in the PP

243 TCRM20

- 168

205 What triggers the PP

206 What is the process sequence of the PP

244 TCRM20

- 169

207 What are the four principles of the PP (for data entering for document

for process)

245 TCRM20

- 171

208 What is the Partner Function Category 246 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

8 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

209 What is the Partner Function

210 What is the Partner Determination Procedure

211 What is the Access Sequence

- 176

212 What is the customizing restriction regarding the assignment of a Partner

Function What are the Hierarchy and Relation between the Partner

Function Category and the Partner Function

213 What is the Relationship Category What is the Relation between the

Partner Function Category and the Relationship Category What is the

connection to the Access sequence

214 What is the use of the Lock

215 What is the Undefined Partner

247 TCRM20

- 178

216 What is the Objective of the PDP

217 What is the use of the PDP

218 Which main data sources are used by the PDP

219 What type of data the PDP brings

220 Which data is determined in the PDP (4)

221 Which PDP parameters are defined (2)

222 To what we assign the Partner Determination Procedure

248 TCRM20

- 179

223 What is the Objective of the Access Sequence

224 What is the Use of the Access Sequence For which objects is it

referring

225 What is the option when no Access Sequence is determined

249 TCRM20

- 180

226 What is the order of events of data determination when processing a

process in the system

227 What are the parameters checked by the AS

228 Which customizing condition regarding the system process is required in

order to relate a PDP to a TrTy

229 What happens when a BP is determined on the PDP but no AS is

assigned to him

250 TCRM20

- 181

230 What is the purpose of actions on the System

231 What is the use of actions on the System

232 What is the terminology for the actions processing

273 TCRM20

- 207

233 What is the sequence of events for executing an action

234 To which System Element the Action Profile is assigned

235 What is the purpose of an Action Profile

236 Which Parameters are determined in the Action Profile regarding the

execution of actions

274 TCRM20

- 208

237 What is the Start Condition and the Schedule Condition on the System

and what is the relation between them

238 For which SO are the conditions assigned

239 What are the two mode of defining them

275 TCRM20

- 209

240 What is the purpose of the Processing Time

241 What kind of Processing Time the System allows and what is the

difference between them (3) Give examples for each

242 To which System Object do we assign the Processing Time

276 TCRM20

- 210

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

9 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

243 Where can we view the assigned actions What parameters are shown

244 What are the Processing types in the System and what is the purpose of

each one

277 TCRM20

- 211

245 What is the Hierarchy of the Action Profile definition

246 What are the parameters of the action profile and which characters has

each

247 What is the relation between a Transaction type and the Action Profile

278 TCRM20

- 212

248 What is the sequence of event when for an action profile to go in active 279 TCRM20

- 213

249 What is a Smart Form How does it work

250 Which kind of examples of activities documentation could be designed on

the SAP Smart Form

281 TCRM20

- 215

251 What is the purpose of the Action Monitor

252 Where is it originated

253 What is the use of the action monitor

254 What is the relation between the action monitor and the selection report

282 TCRM20

- 215

255 What is the responsible component for the Pricing in the CRM System

On which technology is it based

256 Which Pricing elements are included in the IPC From where comes the

relevant data (4 ndash sales product tax)

257 What is the use of the PP

258 On which SAP applications can the IPC be used What are the pricing

possibilities with it

259 What are the limitations of transferring pricing data from the ERP to the

CRM And why httphelpsapcomerp2005_ehp_04helpdataEN352cd77bd7705394e10000009b387c12framesethtm

305 TCRM20

- 243

260 What are the two Implementation Scenarios for the IPC and what is the

difference between them

306 TCRM20

- 244

261 What is the logic structure of the PP

262 On which parameters does the PP influence the Condition types (5 ndash the

use calculation )

307 TCRM20

- 245

263 Which System Objects and Data sources determine the Pricing

Procedure (5)

308 TCRM20

- 246

264 What is the Objective of the Con Ty On which system Object is it

operative

265 What are the characteristics of the Cond Ty

309 TCRM20

- 248

266 What is the objective of the Sequence Access

267 What is the Hierarchy between the AS and the Con Ty

268 Where is it used on the System What is the sequence of events when a

Con Is operated

269 What is a condition record

310 TCRM20

- 249

270 What is the Condition Tables

271 How does the condition Table is activated

272 What is the main restriction regarding the condition table

311 TCRM20

- 250

273 What is the Sequence of events during the Pricing Procedure 312 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

10 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

274 Which Condition techniques are already determined in the System - 251

275 What is the role of the Condition Records on the Pricing Procedure

276 What is the sequence of events of the condition record in the process of

pricing How does a Condition Record calculate the result What other

possibilities are

277 What is the Value scale

313 TCRM20

- 255

278 To which System Object could Conditions be maintained 314 TCRM20

- 256

279 What is included under the Condition Group 315

280 What is the Price Analysis

281 What is the use

282 When is it possible to use it

316 TCRM20

- 257

283 Which different function and uses (other than the regular pricing used on

a BTr) has the Pricing Process

284 What are the restrictions of pricing procedures on CRM

317 TCRM20

- 258

285 What are the different data sources for the Tax Determination

286 How is the Sequence of the tax determination Which component

performs the calculation Which other Data Bases are involved What is the

Output

287 Which CRM Pricing Procedure is recommended for using the TTE

318 TCRM20

- 259

288 What is the hierarchical structure of the FI on the ECC Which

indentifies has each unit (3)

289 What does the hierarchical structure allow

290 What are the two main business scenarios of the CRM Billing 340 TCRM20

- 284

291 What is the process flow of Service Cycle with the Billing 341

292 What is the process flow of sale Cycle with the Billing 342

293 What is the logic Process between the ECC and the CRM regarding the

billing

294 What are the BTrs that use the Billing Doc (5 - sales and service)

295 How can two different business scenarios be integrated into one Billing

Doc

296 Which FI components must be installed and where in order to integrate

the financial Control on the Billing Docs

297 What is the CRM Billing Application

343 TCRM20

- 285

298 What are the main stages on the Billing Process What is included under

inputs Outputs

299 What is the option of integrating information from external systems into

the Billing due List

300 What other options are there by the billing docs

344

301 What are the features of the input processing 345

302 What are the 4 billing methods

303 What is a billing document spilt

304 What is a billing document merge

346 TCRM20

- 289

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc

306 What are the data sources used during the billing process

307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What

is included in each part and what are its parameters

308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding

Billing Documents

309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed

310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc

347 TCRM20

- 291

311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System

and on which cases do you use each one

312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process

348

313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the

use of each

314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool

is used for this purpose

315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting

349 TCRM20

- 292

316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan

317 Which kinds of billing plans are there

318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of

319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan

320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned

350 TCRM20

- 293

321 What is the Billing Unit

322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units

323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to

extract the information

324 To which system object is the BU assigned

351 TCRM20

- 296

325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document

326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system

Object is it defined

327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat

328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination

329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on

another document

330 What is the Billing Relevance

331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process

332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process

333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On

what is it based

352 TCRM20

- 298

334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the

ERP

335 How is it customized on the system

336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document

353 TCRM20

- 299

337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20

- 300

338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 302

339 What are the Middleware Objectives

340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his

features

341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW

connection in order to communicate with the CRM

374

375

TCRM20

- 321

342 What is the SMQ12

343 What is the TRFC

344 How the Queues are processed

345 What is the Scheduler

TCRM20

- 321

346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20

- 326

347 Where is the MW software installed

348 What is included in the CRM Server

349 What are the MW objectives (3)

TCRM20

- 327

350 Which technology runs the process 376

351 What is the Objective of the BDoc

352 What is a BDoc Type

353 What is a BDoc Instance

354 What is a BDoc message

355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc

377

378

TCRM20

- 350

356 Describe the out bounding Process

357 Describe the Inbounding Process

358 What is the use of the Queue

359 What is the administration console

360 What is the validation process

379

361 What is the Objective of the Object management

362 What is the use

363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs

380

364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and

what are the data transfer restrictions

365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and

the CRM

381

366 What is the objective of the data load

367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load

368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)

369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO

370 What is the delta Load

382

371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383

372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20

- 347

373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20

- 348

374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

responsibility of the Administration Console

375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc

376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc

377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc

386

378 What is the Data Integrity Manager

379 What is its use

387

380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and

relation between systems (6)

388

381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc

382 What are the options for debugging

391

383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the

SAP GUI

408

384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client

385 Which configuration tools are there

409

386 What are the different Business Roles (7)

387 Where are they defined

410

388 What are the different areas on the Screen

389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective

TCRM20

- 569

390 What is personalize

391 What is Help Center

392 What is System News

393 What is Central Search

TCRM20

- 570

394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20

- 571

395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles

396 To Which System Element we assign a User

411

397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412

398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR

399 What determines what will on the NB

413

400 What is the use of the Work Center

401 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 572

402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20

- 573

403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage

404 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 574

405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20

- 575

406 What is the use of the Calendar

407 What are the configuration options

TCRM20

- 576

408 Which system could be synched with the Email application

409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding

the Emails

410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which

logical links are there (4)

414 TCRM20

- 578

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center

412 What determines the Work Center

413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the

different between them

414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports

TCRM20

- 579

415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20

- 580

416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20

- 581

417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20

- 586

418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20

- 587

419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)

420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the

assignment block (4)

TCRM20

- 588

421 What is the second view possibility on the UI

422 For what is it used

423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view

424 Who may use this view

TCRM20

- 589

425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20

- 590

426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)

427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display

428 Give examples for Hierarchies

TCRM20

- 591

429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415

430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417

431 What is the role configuration key

432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key

419

433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench

434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed

by the EEWB

435 What is the user application of the EEWB

436 What is the advantage of the EEWB

437 What is the influence on other systems

421

438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422

439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20

- 613

440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each

441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user

442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model

TCRM20

- 615

443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)

444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links

445 What are the customization options of the NB profile

TCRM20

- 617

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

446 Where is the customization done

447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of

links

448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers

449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR

TCRM20

- 619

450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20

- 620

451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)

452 Where is it customized

TCRM20

- 622

453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are

they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the

influence of the layout profile on these links

TCRM20

- 623

454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples

455 Which types of function profile are there (4)

456 What determines the type of the functional profile

457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of

functional profile is it

TCRM20

- 624

458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR

459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org

unit position and user

TCRM20

- 626

460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20

- 627

461 What is the portal integration

462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the

CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal

TCRM20

- 629

463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20

- 636

464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system

465 Which authorization parameters are there

466 Where is the authorization profile defined

467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles

468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding

authorization

`

469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization

profile

TCRM20

- 641

470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role

(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)

TCRM20

- 648

471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links

472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links

473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link

474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role

475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role

476 What are the types of the WCLL

TCRM20

- 653

477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 655

478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)

479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs

480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the

different between them

TCRM20

- 669 ndash

673

481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view

the BTr Where is it defined

TCRM20

- 674

482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers

What purpose does it serve

483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based

484 What is BOL

485 What is a Genil What is its role

TCRM20

- 689

486 What is UI Component TCRM20

- 692

487 What is the model of the BSP

488 What the view of the BSP

489 What is the Controller of the BSP

TCRM20

- 694

490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the

concept

TCRM20

- 695

491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes

492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL

TCRM20

- 696

493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20

- 697

494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed

495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data

handling)

TCRM20

- 709

496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape

object it refers

497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users

TCRM20

- 732

498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key

role (5)

TCRM20

- 735

499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20

- 737

500 What is the role of the design layer

501 What is the purpose of the design layer

502 Where the design layer is logical positioned

503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are

linked to it

TCRM20

- 757

504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it

505 What is an Assignment

506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet

TCRM20

- 766

507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20

- 785

508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786

510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the

different elements

511 What are the processing restrictions

TCRM20

- 787

512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the

EEW What is the difference when creating a new table

TCRM20

- 788

513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different

between the EEW

514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)

TCRM20

- 812

515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and

which

TCRM20

- 812

516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW

517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI

518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are

not

TCRM20

- 821

519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW

when initiating a change

TCRM20

- 829

520 What is a component

521 What is the component enhancement concept

522 How does it work

523 What are the process elements when creating a new component

TCRM20

- 830

524

Question Page on

TCR

1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to

the SAP

2 What four other added values the system provides

TCRM10 -

26

3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)

4 What is the logic relation between them

5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)

TCRM10 -

27

6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)

7 What is the logic relation between them

8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)

TCRM10 -

28

9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)

10 What is the logic relation between them

TCRM10 -

29

11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -

30

12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

(8) 37

13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture

14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)

TCRM10 -

44

15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of

updates tare there

16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which

component do it What is the purpose of the verification

TCRM10 -

46

17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange

18 What is the role of the adapters

19 What is the CRM Adapter

20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas

TCRM10 -

47

21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)

22 What are the different components on the Application (3)

23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each

TCRM10 -

52

24 What is the purpose of the IC

25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)

TCRM10 -

53

26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile

users (3)

TCRM10 -

54

27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -

55

28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -

61

29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -

63

30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the

integration

31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing

TCRM10 -

80

32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan

33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)

34 What are the sub elements of a MP

35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)

36 What are the campaign characters (4)

37 What are the sub elements of a campaign

TCRM10 -

81

38 What is the meaning of segmentation

39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data

resources for each

40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers

41 What is the use of the attribute list

TCRM10 -

86

42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -

88

43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

group method

44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom

89

45 What is the activity TCRM10 -

95

46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign

47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned

TCRM10 -

96

48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)

49 How does is works (4)

50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management

51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM

TCRM10 -

108

52 What is the Process of TPM

53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of

each

TCRM10 -

109

54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -

118

55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -

119

56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -

120

57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)

58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding

E Service (7) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

133

59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -

135

60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may

perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

140

61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -

141

62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)

63 What is PRM

64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to

achieve it efficient How

TCRM10 -

150

65 What is eh concept of the PCM

66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)

TCRM10 -

151

67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management

68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each

(6)

TCRM10 -

153

69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

157

70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158

72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -

170

73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the

Business Partner integrate

TCRM10 -

171

74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -

178

75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -

179

76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose

77 Which processes it follows

78 What are its attributes (3)

TCRM10 -

188

79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -

189

80 What is the purpose of the activity Management

81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System

TCRM10 -

193

82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -

194

83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -

195

84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -

199

85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -

200

86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales

Methodology (4)

TCRM10 -

201

87 What are the initials PPM

88 What is the purpose of the tool

89 Who uses it and how (2)

TCRM10 -

201

90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -

207

91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -

208

92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to

maintain contracts

93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)

94 What is the relation between the contract and the order

TCRM10 -

218

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order

96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -

219

97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts

regarding work processes and updates (4)

TCRM10 -

220

98 What is the ICM What is his use

99 What are its business goals (3)

100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results

TCRM10 -

225

101 What are the main roles in an IC

102 What is the scratch pad

103 What is the Account info

104 What is the Alert

105 What is the Communication Information

106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers

107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system

TCRM10 -

231

108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM

109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)

TCRM10 -

232

110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be

integrated

TCRM10 -

233

111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -

234

112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the

knowledge search What are the results

TCRM10 -

235

113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)

114 What is an Interactive scripting

115 What is ERMS

116 What is the IDI

TCRM10 -

247

117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how

(3)

118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)

TCRM10 -

248

119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI

planned

120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting

121 What other IDI tools are there

TCRM10 -

249

122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of

creating a call list

TCRM10 -

250

123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)

124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)

TCRM10 -

251

125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -

257

126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 8: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

8 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

209 What is the Partner Function

210 What is the Partner Determination Procedure

211 What is the Access Sequence

- 176

212 What is the customizing restriction regarding the assignment of a Partner

Function What are the Hierarchy and Relation between the Partner

Function Category and the Partner Function

213 What is the Relationship Category What is the Relation between the

Partner Function Category and the Relationship Category What is the

connection to the Access sequence

214 What is the use of the Lock

215 What is the Undefined Partner

247 TCRM20

- 178

216 What is the Objective of the PDP

217 What is the use of the PDP

218 Which main data sources are used by the PDP

219 What type of data the PDP brings

220 Which data is determined in the PDP (4)

221 Which PDP parameters are defined (2)

222 To what we assign the Partner Determination Procedure

248 TCRM20

- 179

223 What is the Objective of the Access Sequence

224 What is the Use of the Access Sequence For which objects is it

referring

225 What is the option when no Access Sequence is determined

249 TCRM20

- 180

226 What is the order of events of data determination when processing a

process in the system

227 What are the parameters checked by the AS

228 Which customizing condition regarding the system process is required in

order to relate a PDP to a TrTy

229 What happens when a BP is determined on the PDP but no AS is

assigned to him

250 TCRM20

- 181

230 What is the purpose of actions on the System

231 What is the use of actions on the System

232 What is the terminology for the actions processing

273 TCRM20

- 207

233 What is the sequence of events for executing an action

234 To which System Element the Action Profile is assigned

235 What is the purpose of an Action Profile

236 Which Parameters are determined in the Action Profile regarding the

execution of actions

274 TCRM20

- 208

237 What is the Start Condition and the Schedule Condition on the System

and what is the relation between them

238 For which SO are the conditions assigned

239 What are the two mode of defining them

275 TCRM20

- 209

240 What is the purpose of the Processing Time

241 What kind of Processing Time the System allows and what is the

difference between them (3) Give examples for each

242 To which System Object do we assign the Processing Time

276 TCRM20

- 210

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

9 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

243 Where can we view the assigned actions What parameters are shown

244 What are the Processing types in the System and what is the purpose of

each one

277 TCRM20

- 211

245 What is the Hierarchy of the Action Profile definition

246 What are the parameters of the action profile and which characters has

each

247 What is the relation between a Transaction type and the Action Profile

278 TCRM20

- 212

248 What is the sequence of event when for an action profile to go in active 279 TCRM20

- 213

249 What is a Smart Form How does it work

250 Which kind of examples of activities documentation could be designed on

the SAP Smart Form

281 TCRM20

- 215

251 What is the purpose of the Action Monitor

252 Where is it originated

253 What is the use of the action monitor

254 What is the relation between the action monitor and the selection report

282 TCRM20

- 215

255 What is the responsible component for the Pricing in the CRM System

On which technology is it based

256 Which Pricing elements are included in the IPC From where comes the

relevant data (4 ndash sales product tax)

257 What is the use of the PP

258 On which SAP applications can the IPC be used What are the pricing

possibilities with it

259 What are the limitations of transferring pricing data from the ERP to the

CRM And why httphelpsapcomerp2005_ehp_04helpdataEN352cd77bd7705394e10000009b387c12framesethtm

305 TCRM20

- 243

260 What are the two Implementation Scenarios for the IPC and what is the

difference between them

306 TCRM20

- 244

261 What is the logic structure of the PP

262 On which parameters does the PP influence the Condition types (5 ndash the

use calculation )

307 TCRM20

- 245

263 Which System Objects and Data sources determine the Pricing

Procedure (5)

308 TCRM20

- 246

264 What is the Objective of the Con Ty On which system Object is it

operative

265 What are the characteristics of the Cond Ty

309 TCRM20

- 248

266 What is the objective of the Sequence Access

267 What is the Hierarchy between the AS and the Con Ty

268 Where is it used on the System What is the sequence of events when a

Con Is operated

269 What is a condition record

310 TCRM20

- 249

270 What is the Condition Tables

271 How does the condition Table is activated

272 What is the main restriction regarding the condition table

311 TCRM20

- 250

273 What is the Sequence of events during the Pricing Procedure 312 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

10 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

274 Which Condition techniques are already determined in the System - 251

275 What is the role of the Condition Records on the Pricing Procedure

276 What is the sequence of events of the condition record in the process of

pricing How does a Condition Record calculate the result What other

possibilities are

277 What is the Value scale

313 TCRM20

- 255

278 To which System Object could Conditions be maintained 314 TCRM20

- 256

279 What is included under the Condition Group 315

280 What is the Price Analysis

281 What is the use

282 When is it possible to use it

316 TCRM20

- 257

283 Which different function and uses (other than the regular pricing used on

a BTr) has the Pricing Process

284 What are the restrictions of pricing procedures on CRM

317 TCRM20

- 258

285 What are the different data sources for the Tax Determination

286 How is the Sequence of the tax determination Which component

performs the calculation Which other Data Bases are involved What is the

Output

287 Which CRM Pricing Procedure is recommended for using the TTE

318 TCRM20

- 259

288 What is the hierarchical structure of the FI on the ECC Which

indentifies has each unit (3)

289 What does the hierarchical structure allow

290 What are the two main business scenarios of the CRM Billing 340 TCRM20

- 284

291 What is the process flow of Service Cycle with the Billing 341

292 What is the process flow of sale Cycle with the Billing 342

293 What is the logic Process between the ECC and the CRM regarding the

billing

294 What are the BTrs that use the Billing Doc (5 - sales and service)

295 How can two different business scenarios be integrated into one Billing

Doc

296 Which FI components must be installed and where in order to integrate

the financial Control on the Billing Docs

297 What is the CRM Billing Application

343 TCRM20

- 285

298 What are the main stages on the Billing Process What is included under

inputs Outputs

299 What is the option of integrating information from external systems into

the Billing due List

300 What other options are there by the billing docs

344

301 What are the features of the input processing 345

302 What are the 4 billing methods

303 What is a billing document spilt

304 What is a billing document merge

346 TCRM20

- 289

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc

306 What are the data sources used during the billing process

307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What

is included in each part and what are its parameters

308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding

Billing Documents

309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed

310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc

347 TCRM20

- 291

311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System

and on which cases do you use each one

312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process

348

313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the

use of each

314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool

is used for this purpose

315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting

349 TCRM20

- 292

316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan

317 Which kinds of billing plans are there

318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of

319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan

320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned

350 TCRM20

- 293

321 What is the Billing Unit

322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units

323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to

extract the information

324 To which system object is the BU assigned

351 TCRM20

- 296

325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document

326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system

Object is it defined

327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat

328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination

329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on

another document

330 What is the Billing Relevance

331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process

332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process

333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On

what is it based

352 TCRM20

- 298

334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the

ERP

335 How is it customized on the system

336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document

353 TCRM20

- 299

337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20

- 300

338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 302

339 What are the Middleware Objectives

340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his

features

341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW

connection in order to communicate with the CRM

374

375

TCRM20

- 321

342 What is the SMQ12

343 What is the TRFC

344 How the Queues are processed

345 What is the Scheduler

TCRM20

- 321

346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20

- 326

347 Where is the MW software installed

348 What is included in the CRM Server

349 What are the MW objectives (3)

TCRM20

- 327

350 Which technology runs the process 376

351 What is the Objective of the BDoc

352 What is a BDoc Type

353 What is a BDoc Instance

354 What is a BDoc message

355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc

377

378

TCRM20

- 350

356 Describe the out bounding Process

357 Describe the Inbounding Process

358 What is the use of the Queue

359 What is the administration console

360 What is the validation process

379

361 What is the Objective of the Object management

362 What is the use

363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs

380

364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and

what are the data transfer restrictions

365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and

the CRM

381

366 What is the objective of the data load

367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load

368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)

369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO

370 What is the delta Load

382

371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383

372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20

- 347

373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20

- 348

374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

responsibility of the Administration Console

375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc

376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc

377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc

386

378 What is the Data Integrity Manager

379 What is its use

387

380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and

relation between systems (6)

388

381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc

382 What are the options for debugging

391

383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the

SAP GUI

408

384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client

385 Which configuration tools are there

409

386 What are the different Business Roles (7)

387 Where are they defined

410

388 What are the different areas on the Screen

389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective

TCRM20

- 569

390 What is personalize

391 What is Help Center

392 What is System News

393 What is Central Search

TCRM20

- 570

394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20

- 571

395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles

396 To Which System Element we assign a User

411

397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412

398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR

399 What determines what will on the NB

413

400 What is the use of the Work Center

401 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 572

402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20

- 573

403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage

404 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 574

405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20

- 575

406 What is the use of the Calendar

407 What are the configuration options

TCRM20

- 576

408 Which system could be synched with the Email application

409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding

the Emails

410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which

logical links are there (4)

414 TCRM20

- 578

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center

412 What determines the Work Center

413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the

different between them

414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports

TCRM20

- 579

415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20

- 580

416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20

- 581

417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20

- 586

418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20

- 587

419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)

420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the

assignment block (4)

TCRM20

- 588

421 What is the second view possibility on the UI

422 For what is it used

423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view

424 Who may use this view

TCRM20

- 589

425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20

- 590

426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)

427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display

428 Give examples for Hierarchies

TCRM20

- 591

429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415

430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417

431 What is the role configuration key

432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key

419

433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench

434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed

by the EEWB

435 What is the user application of the EEWB

436 What is the advantage of the EEWB

437 What is the influence on other systems

421

438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422

439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20

- 613

440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each

441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user

442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model

TCRM20

- 615

443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)

444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links

445 What are the customization options of the NB profile

TCRM20

- 617

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

446 Where is the customization done

447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of

links

448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers

449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR

TCRM20

- 619

450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20

- 620

451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)

452 Where is it customized

TCRM20

- 622

453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are

they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the

influence of the layout profile on these links

TCRM20

- 623

454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples

455 Which types of function profile are there (4)

456 What determines the type of the functional profile

457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of

functional profile is it

TCRM20

- 624

458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR

459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org

unit position and user

TCRM20

- 626

460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20

- 627

461 What is the portal integration

462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the

CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal

TCRM20

- 629

463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20

- 636

464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system

465 Which authorization parameters are there

466 Where is the authorization profile defined

467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles

468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding

authorization

`

469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization

profile

TCRM20

- 641

470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role

(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)

TCRM20

- 648

471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links

472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links

473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link

474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role

475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role

476 What are the types of the WCLL

TCRM20

- 653

477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 655

478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)

479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs

480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the

different between them

TCRM20

- 669 ndash

673

481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view

the BTr Where is it defined

TCRM20

- 674

482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers

What purpose does it serve

483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based

484 What is BOL

485 What is a Genil What is its role

TCRM20

- 689

486 What is UI Component TCRM20

- 692

487 What is the model of the BSP

488 What the view of the BSP

489 What is the Controller of the BSP

TCRM20

- 694

490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the

concept

TCRM20

- 695

491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes

492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL

TCRM20

- 696

493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20

- 697

494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed

495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data

handling)

TCRM20

- 709

496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape

object it refers

497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users

TCRM20

- 732

498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key

role (5)

TCRM20

- 735

499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20

- 737

500 What is the role of the design layer

501 What is the purpose of the design layer

502 Where the design layer is logical positioned

503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are

linked to it

TCRM20

- 757

504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it

505 What is an Assignment

506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet

TCRM20

- 766

507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20

- 785

508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786

510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the

different elements

511 What are the processing restrictions

TCRM20

- 787

512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the

EEW What is the difference when creating a new table

TCRM20

- 788

513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different

between the EEW

514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)

TCRM20

- 812

515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and

which

TCRM20

- 812

516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW

517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI

518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are

not

TCRM20

- 821

519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW

when initiating a change

TCRM20

- 829

520 What is a component

521 What is the component enhancement concept

522 How does it work

523 What are the process elements when creating a new component

TCRM20

- 830

524

Question Page on

TCR

1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to

the SAP

2 What four other added values the system provides

TCRM10 -

26

3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)

4 What is the logic relation between them

5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)

TCRM10 -

27

6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)

7 What is the logic relation between them

8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)

TCRM10 -

28

9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)

10 What is the logic relation between them

TCRM10 -

29

11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -

30

12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

(8) 37

13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture

14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)

TCRM10 -

44

15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of

updates tare there

16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which

component do it What is the purpose of the verification

TCRM10 -

46

17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange

18 What is the role of the adapters

19 What is the CRM Adapter

20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas

TCRM10 -

47

21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)

22 What are the different components on the Application (3)

23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each

TCRM10 -

52

24 What is the purpose of the IC

25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)

TCRM10 -

53

26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile

users (3)

TCRM10 -

54

27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -

55

28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -

61

29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -

63

30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the

integration

31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing

TCRM10 -

80

32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan

33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)

34 What are the sub elements of a MP

35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)

36 What are the campaign characters (4)

37 What are the sub elements of a campaign

TCRM10 -

81

38 What is the meaning of segmentation

39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data

resources for each

40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers

41 What is the use of the attribute list

TCRM10 -

86

42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -

88

43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

group method

44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom

89

45 What is the activity TCRM10 -

95

46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign

47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned

TCRM10 -

96

48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)

49 How does is works (4)

50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management

51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM

TCRM10 -

108

52 What is the Process of TPM

53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of

each

TCRM10 -

109

54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -

118

55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -

119

56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -

120

57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)

58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding

E Service (7) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

133

59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -

135

60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may

perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

140

61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -

141

62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)

63 What is PRM

64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to

achieve it efficient How

TCRM10 -

150

65 What is eh concept of the PCM

66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)

TCRM10 -

151

67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management

68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each

(6)

TCRM10 -

153

69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

157

70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158

72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -

170

73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the

Business Partner integrate

TCRM10 -

171

74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -

178

75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -

179

76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose

77 Which processes it follows

78 What are its attributes (3)

TCRM10 -

188

79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -

189

80 What is the purpose of the activity Management

81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System

TCRM10 -

193

82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -

194

83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -

195

84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -

199

85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -

200

86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales

Methodology (4)

TCRM10 -

201

87 What are the initials PPM

88 What is the purpose of the tool

89 Who uses it and how (2)

TCRM10 -

201

90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -

207

91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -

208

92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to

maintain contracts

93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)

94 What is the relation between the contract and the order

TCRM10 -

218

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order

96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -

219

97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts

regarding work processes and updates (4)

TCRM10 -

220

98 What is the ICM What is his use

99 What are its business goals (3)

100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results

TCRM10 -

225

101 What are the main roles in an IC

102 What is the scratch pad

103 What is the Account info

104 What is the Alert

105 What is the Communication Information

106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers

107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system

TCRM10 -

231

108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM

109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)

TCRM10 -

232

110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be

integrated

TCRM10 -

233

111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -

234

112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the

knowledge search What are the results

TCRM10 -

235

113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)

114 What is an Interactive scripting

115 What is ERMS

116 What is the IDI

TCRM10 -

247

117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how

(3)

118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)

TCRM10 -

248

119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI

planned

120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting

121 What other IDI tools are there

TCRM10 -

249

122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of

creating a call list

TCRM10 -

250

123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)

124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)

TCRM10 -

251

125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -

257

126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 9: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

9 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

243 Where can we view the assigned actions What parameters are shown

244 What are the Processing types in the System and what is the purpose of

each one

277 TCRM20

- 211

245 What is the Hierarchy of the Action Profile definition

246 What are the parameters of the action profile and which characters has

each

247 What is the relation between a Transaction type and the Action Profile

278 TCRM20

- 212

248 What is the sequence of event when for an action profile to go in active 279 TCRM20

- 213

249 What is a Smart Form How does it work

250 Which kind of examples of activities documentation could be designed on

the SAP Smart Form

281 TCRM20

- 215

251 What is the purpose of the Action Monitor

252 Where is it originated

253 What is the use of the action monitor

254 What is the relation between the action monitor and the selection report

282 TCRM20

- 215

255 What is the responsible component for the Pricing in the CRM System

On which technology is it based

256 Which Pricing elements are included in the IPC From where comes the

relevant data (4 ndash sales product tax)

257 What is the use of the PP

258 On which SAP applications can the IPC be used What are the pricing

possibilities with it

259 What are the limitations of transferring pricing data from the ERP to the

CRM And why httphelpsapcomerp2005_ehp_04helpdataEN352cd77bd7705394e10000009b387c12framesethtm

305 TCRM20

- 243

260 What are the two Implementation Scenarios for the IPC and what is the

difference between them

306 TCRM20

- 244

261 What is the logic structure of the PP

262 On which parameters does the PP influence the Condition types (5 ndash the

use calculation )

307 TCRM20

- 245

263 Which System Objects and Data sources determine the Pricing

Procedure (5)

308 TCRM20

- 246

264 What is the Objective of the Con Ty On which system Object is it

operative

265 What are the characteristics of the Cond Ty

309 TCRM20

- 248

266 What is the objective of the Sequence Access

267 What is the Hierarchy between the AS and the Con Ty

268 Where is it used on the System What is the sequence of events when a

Con Is operated

269 What is a condition record

310 TCRM20

- 249

270 What is the Condition Tables

271 How does the condition Table is activated

272 What is the main restriction regarding the condition table

311 TCRM20

- 250

273 What is the Sequence of events during the Pricing Procedure 312 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

10 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

274 Which Condition techniques are already determined in the System - 251

275 What is the role of the Condition Records on the Pricing Procedure

276 What is the sequence of events of the condition record in the process of

pricing How does a Condition Record calculate the result What other

possibilities are

277 What is the Value scale

313 TCRM20

- 255

278 To which System Object could Conditions be maintained 314 TCRM20

- 256

279 What is included under the Condition Group 315

280 What is the Price Analysis

281 What is the use

282 When is it possible to use it

316 TCRM20

- 257

283 Which different function and uses (other than the regular pricing used on

a BTr) has the Pricing Process

284 What are the restrictions of pricing procedures on CRM

317 TCRM20

- 258

285 What are the different data sources for the Tax Determination

286 How is the Sequence of the tax determination Which component

performs the calculation Which other Data Bases are involved What is the

Output

287 Which CRM Pricing Procedure is recommended for using the TTE

318 TCRM20

- 259

288 What is the hierarchical structure of the FI on the ECC Which

indentifies has each unit (3)

289 What does the hierarchical structure allow

290 What are the two main business scenarios of the CRM Billing 340 TCRM20

- 284

291 What is the process flow of Service Cycle with the Billing 341

292 What is the process flow of sale Cycle with the Billing 342

293 What is the logic Process between the ECC and the CRM regarding the

billing

294 What are the BTrs that use the Billing Doc (5 - sales and service)

295 How can two different business scenarios be integrated into one Billing

Doc

296 Which FI components must be installed and where in order to integrate

the financial Control on the Billing Docs

297 What is the CRM Billing Application

343 TCRM20

- 285

298 What are the main stages on the Billing Process What is included under

inputs Outputs

299 What is the option of integrating information from external systems into

the Billing due List

300 What other options are there by the billing docs

344

301 What are the features of the input processing 345

302 What are the 4 billing methods

303 What is a billing document spilt

304 What is a billing document merge

346 TCRM20

- 289

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc

306 What are the data sources used during the billing process

307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What

is included in each part and what are its parameters

308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding

Billing Documents

309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed

310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc

347 TCRM20

- 291

311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System

and on which cases do you use each one

312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process

348

313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the

use of each

314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool

is used for this purpose

315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting

349 TCRM20

- 292

316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan

317 Which kinds of billing plans are there

318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of

319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan

320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned

350 TCRM20

- 293

321 What is the Billing Unit

322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units

323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to

extract the information

324 To which system object is the BU assigned

351 TCRM20

- 296

325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document

326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system

Object is it defined

327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat

328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination

329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on

another document

330 What is the Billing Relevance

331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process

332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process

333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On

what is it based

352 TCRM20

- 298

334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the

ERP

335 How is it customized on the system

336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document

353 TCRM20

- 299

337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20

- 300

338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 302

339 What are the Middleware Objectives

340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his

features

341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW

connection in order to communicate with the CRM

374

375

TCRM20

- 321

342 What is the SMQ12

343 What is the TRFC

344 How the Queues are processed

345 What is the Scheduler

TCRM20

- 321

346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20

- 326

347 Where is the MW software installed

348 What is included in the CRM Server

349 What are the MW objectives (3)

TCRM20

- 327

350 Which technology runs the process 376

351 What is the Objective of the BDoc

352 What is a BDoc Type

353 What is a BDoc Instance

354 What is a BDoc message

355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc

377

378

TCRM20

- 350

356 Describe the out bounding Process

357 Describe the Inbounding Process

358 What is the use of the Queue

359 What is the administration console

360 What is the validation process

379

361 What is the Objective of the Object management

362 What is the use

363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs

380

364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and

what are the data transfer restrictions

365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and

the CRM

381

366 What is the objective of the data load

367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load

368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)

369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO

370 What is the delta Load

382

371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383

372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20

- 347

373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20

- 348

374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

responsibility of the Administration Console

375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc

376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc

377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc

386

378 What is the Data Integrity Manager

379 What is its use

387

380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and

relation between systems (6)

388

381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc

382 What are the options for debugging

391

383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the

SAP GUI

408

384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client

385 Which configuration tools are there

409

386 What are the different Business Roles (7)

387 Where are they defined

410

388 What are the different areas on the Screen

389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective

TCRM20

- 569

390 What is personalize

391 What is Help Center

392 What is System News

393 What is Central Search

TCRM20

- 570

394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20

- 571

395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles

396 To Which System Element we assign a User

411

397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412

398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR

399 What determines what will on the NB

413

400 What is the use of the Work Center

401 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 572

402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20

- 573

403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage

404 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 574

405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20

- 575

406 What is the use of the Calendar

407 What are the configuration options

TCRM20

- 576

408 Which system could be synched with the Email application

409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding

the Emails

410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which

logical links are there (4)

414 TCRM20

- 578

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center

412 What determines the Work Center

413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the

different between them

414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports

TCRM20

- 579

415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20

- 580

416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20

- 581

417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20

- 586

418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20

- 587

419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)

420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the

assignment block (4)

TCRM20

- 588

421 What is the second view possibility on the UI

422 For what is it used

423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view

424 Who may use this view

TCRM20

- 589

425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20

- 590

426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)

427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display

428 Give examples for Hierarchies

TCRM20

- 591

429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415

430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417

431 What is the role configuration key

432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key

419

433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench

434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed

by the EEWB

435 What is the user application of the EEWB

436 What is the advantage of the EEWB

437 What is the influence on other systems

421

438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422

439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20

- 613

440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each

441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user

442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model

TCRM20

- 615

443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)

444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links

445 What are the customization options of the NB profile

TCRM20

- 617

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

446 Where is the customization done

447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of

links

448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers

449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR

TCRM20

- 619

450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20

- 620

451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)

452 Where is it customized

TCRM20

- 622

453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are

they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the

influence of the layout profile on these links

TCRM20

- 623

454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples

455 Which types of function profile are there (4)

456 What determines the type of the functional profile

457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of

functional profile is it

TCRM20

- 624

458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR

459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org

unit position and user

TCRM20

- 626

460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20

- 627

461 What is the portal integration

462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the

CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal

TCRM20

- 629

463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20

- 636

464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system

465 Which authorization parameters are there

466 Where is the authorization profile defined

467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles

468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding

authorization

`

469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization

profile

TCRM20

- 641

470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role

(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)

TCRM20

- 648

471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links

472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links

473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link

474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role

475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role

476 What are the types of the WCLL

TCRM20

- 653

477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 655

478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)

479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs

480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the

different between them

TCRM20

- 669 ndash

673

481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view

the BTr Where is it defined

TCRM20

- 674

482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers

What purpose does it serve

483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based

484 What is BOL

485 What is a Genil What is its role

TCRM20

- 689

486 What is UI Component TCRM20

- 692

487 What is the model of the BSP

488 What the view of the BSP

489 What is the Controller of the BSP

TCRM20

- 694

490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the

concept

TCRM20

- 695

491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes

492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL

TCRM20

- 696

493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20

- 697

494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed

495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data

handling)

TCRM20

- 709

496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape

object it refers

497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users

TCRM20

- 732

498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key

role (5)

TCRM20

- 735

499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20

- 737

500 What is the role of the design layer

501 What is the purpose of the design layer

502 Where the design layer is logical positioned

503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are

linked to it

TCRM20

- 757

504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it

505 What is an Assignment

506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet

TCRM20

- 766

507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20

- 785

508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786

510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the

different elements

511 What are the processing restrictions

TCRM20

- 787

512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the

EEW What is the difference when creating a new table

TCRM20

- 788

513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different

between the EEW

514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)

TCRM20

- 812

515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and

which

TCRM20

- 812

516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW

517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI

518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are

not

TCRM20

- 821

519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW

when initiating a change

TCRM20

- 829

520 What is a component

521 What is the component enhancement concept

522 How does it work

523 What are the process elements when creating a new component

TCRM20

- 830

524

Question Page on

TCR

1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to

the SAP

2 What four other added values the system provides

TCRM10 -

26

3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)

4 What is the logic relation between them

5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)

TCRM10 -

27

6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)

7 What is the logic relation between them

8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)

TCRM10 -

28

9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)

10 What is the logic relation between them

TCRM10 -

29

11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -

30

12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

(8) 37

13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture

14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)

TCRM10 -

44

15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of

updates tare there

16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which

component do it What is the purpose of the verification

TCRM10 -

46

17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange

18 What is the role of the adapters

19 What is the CRM Adapter

20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas

TCRM10 -

47

21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)

22 What are the different components on the Application (3)

23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each

TCRM10 -

52

24 What is the purpose of the IC

25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)

TCRM10 -

53

26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile

users (3)

TCRM10 -

54

27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -

55

28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -

61

29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -

63

30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the

integration

31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing

TCRM10 -

80

32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan

33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)

34 What are the sub elements of a MP

35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)

36 What are the campaign characters (4)

37 What are the sub elements of a campaign

TCRM10 -

81

38 What is the meaning of segmentation

39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data

resources for each

40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers

41 What is the use of the attribute list

TCRM10 -

86

42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -

88

43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

group method

44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom

89

45 What is the activity TCRM10 -

95

46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign

47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned

TCRM10 -

96

48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)

49 How does is works (4)

50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management

51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM

TCRM10 -

108

52 What is the Process of TPM

53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of

each

TCRM10 -

109

54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -

118

55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -

119

56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -

120

57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)

58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding

E Service (7) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

133

59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -

135

60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may

perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

140

61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -

141

62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)

63 What is PRM

64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to

achieve it efficient How

TCRM10 -

150

65 What is eh concept of the PCM

66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)

TCRM10 -

151

67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management

68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each

(6)

TCRM10 -

153

69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

157

70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158

72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -

170

73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the

Business Partner integrate

TCRM10 -

171

74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -

178

75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -

179

76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose

77 Which processes it follows

78 What are its attributes (3)

TCRM10 -

188

79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -

189

80 What is the purpose of the activity Management

81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System

TCRM10 -

193

82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -

194

83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -

195

84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -

199

85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -

200

86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales

Methodology (4)

TCRM10 -

201

87 What are the initials PPM

88 What is the purpose of the tool

89 Who uses it and how (2)

TCRM10 -

201

90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -

207

91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -

208

92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to

maintain contracts

93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)

94 What is the relation between the contract and the order

TCRM10 -

218

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order

96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -

219

97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts

regarding work processes and updates (4)

TCRM10 -

220

98 What is the ICM What is his use

99 What are its business goals (3)

100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results

TCRM10 -

225

101 What are the main roles in an IC

102 What is the scratch pad

103 What is the Account info

104 What is the Alert

105 What is the Communication Information

106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers

107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system

TCRM10 -

231

108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM

109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)

TCRM10 -

232

110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be

integrated

TCRM10 -

233

111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -

234

112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the

knowledge search What are the results

TCRM10 -

235

113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)

114 What is an Interactive scripting

115 What is ERMS

116 What is the IDI

TCRM10 -

247

117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how

(3)

118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)

TCRM10 -

248

119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI

planned

120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting

121 What other IDI tools are there

TCRM10 -

249

122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of

creating a call list

TCRM10 -

250

123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)

124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)

TCRM10 -

251

125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -

257

126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 10: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

10 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

274 Which Condition techniques are already determined in the System - 251

275 What is the role of the Condition Records on the Pricing Procedure

276 What is the sequence of events of the condition record in the process of

pricing How does a Condition Record calculate the result What other

possibilities are

277 What is the Value scale

313 TCRM20

- 255

278 To which System Object could Conditions be maintained 314 TCRM20

- 256

279 What is included under the Condition Group 315

280 What is the Price Analysis

281 What is the use

282 When is it possible to use it

316 TCRM20

- 257

283 Which different function and uses (other than the regular pricing used on

a BTr) has the Pricing Process

284 What are the restrictions of pricing procedures on CRM

317 TCRM20

- 258

285 What are the different data sources for the Tax Determination

286 How is the Sequence of the tax determination Which component

performs the calculation Which other Data Bases are involved What is the

Output

287 Which CRM Pricing Procedure is recommended for using the TTE

318 TCRM20

- 259

288 What is the hierarchical structure of the FI on the ECC Which

indentifies has each unit (3)

289 What does the hierarchical structure allow

290 What are the two main business scenarios of the CRM Billing 340 TCRM20

- 284

291 What is the process flow of Service Cycle with the Billing 341

292 What is the process flow of sale Cycle with the Billing 342

293 What is the logic Process between the ECC and the CRM regarding the

billing

294 What are the BTrs that use the Billing Doc (5 - sales and service)

295 How can two different business scenarios be integrated into one Billing

Doc

296 Which FI components must be installed and where in order to integrate

the financial Control on the Billing Docs

297 What is the CRM Billing Application

343 TCRM20

- 285

298 What are the main stages on the Billing Process What is included under

inputs Outputs

299 What is the option of integrating information from external systems into

the Billing due List

300 What other options are there by the billing docs

344

301 What are the features of the input processing 345

302 What are the 4 billing methods

303 What is a billing document spilt

304 What is a billing document merge

346 TCRM20

- 289

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc

306 What are the data sources used during the billing process

307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What

is included in each part and what are its parameters

308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding

Billing Documents

309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed

310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc

347 TCRM20

- 291

311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System

and on which cases do you use each one

312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process

348

313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the

use of each

314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool

is used for this purpose

315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting

349 TCRM20

- 292

316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan

317 Which kinds of billing plans are there

318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of

319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan

320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned

350 TCRM20

- 293

321 What is the Billing Unit

322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units

323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to

extract the information

324 To which system object is the BU assigned

351 TCRM20

- 296

325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document

326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system

Object is it defined

327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat

328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination

329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on

another document

330 What is the Billing Relevance

331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process

332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process

333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On

what is it based

352 TCRM20

- 298

334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the

ERP

335 How is it customized on the system

336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document

353 TCRM20

- 299

337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20

- 300

338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 302

339 What are the Middleware Objectives

340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his

features

341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW

connection in order to communicate with the CRM

374

375

TCRM20

- 321

342 What is the SMQ12

343 What is the TRFC

344 How the Queues are processed

345 What is the Scheduler

TCRM20

- 321

346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20

- 326

347 Where is the MW software installed

348 What is included in the CRM Server

349 What are the MW objectives (3)

TCRM20

- 327

350 Which technology runs the process 376

351 What is the Objective of the BDoc

352 What is a BDoc Type

353 What is a BDoc Instance

354 What is a BDoc message

355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc

377

378

TCRM20

- 350

356 Describe the out bounding Process

357 Describe the Inbounding Process

358 What is the use of the Queue

359 What is the administration console

360 What is the validation process

379

361 What is the Objective of the Object management

362 What is the use

363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs

380

364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and

what are the data transfer restrictions

365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and

the CRM

381

366 What is the objective of the data load

367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load

368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)

369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO

370 What is the delta Load

382

371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383

372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20

- 347

373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20

- 348

374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

responsibility of the Administration Console

375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc

376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc

377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc

386

378 What is the Data Integrity Manager

379 What is its use

387

380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and

relation between systems (6)

388

381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc

382 What are the options for debugging

391

383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the

SAP GUI

408

384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client

385 Which configuration tools are there

409

386 What are the different Business Roles (7)

387 Where are they defined

410

388 What are the different areas on the Screen

389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective

TCRM20

- 569

390 What is personalize

391 What is Help Center

392 What is System News

393 What is Central Search

TCRM20

- 570

394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20

- 571

395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles

396 To Which System Element we assign a User

411

397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412

398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR

399 What determines what will on the NB

413

400 What is the use of the Work Center

401 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 572

402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20

- 573

403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage

404 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 574

405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20

- 575

406 What is the use of the Calendar

407 What are the configuration options

TCRM20

- 576

408 Which system could be synched with the Email application

409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding

the Emails

410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which

logical links are there (4)

414 TCRM20

- 578

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center

412 What determines the Work Center

413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the

different between them

414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports

TCRM20

- 579

415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20

- 580

416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20

- 581

417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20

- 586

418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20

- 587

419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)

420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the

assignment block (4)

TCRM20

- 588

421 What is the second view possibility on the UI

422 For what is it used

423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view

424 Who may use this view

TCRM20

- 589

425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20

- 590

426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)

427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display

428 Give examples for Hierarchies

TCRM20

- 591

429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415

430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417

431 What is the role configuration key

432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key

419

433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench

434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed

by the EEWB

435 What is the user application of the EEWB

436 What is the advantage of the EEWB

437 What is the influence on other systems

421

438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422

439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20

- 613

440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each

441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user

442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model

TCRM20

- 615

443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)

444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links

445 What are the customization options of the NB profile

TCRM20

- 617

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

446 Where is the customization done

447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of

links

448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers

449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR

TCRM20

- 619

450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20

- 620

451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)

452 Where is it customized

TCRM20

- 622

453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are

they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the

influence of the layout profile on these links

TCRM20

- 623

454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples

455 Which types of function profile are there (4)

456 What determines the type of the functional profile

457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of

functional profile is it

TCRM20

- 624

458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR

459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org

unit position and user

TCRM20

- 626

460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20

- 627

461 What is the portal integration

462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the

CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal

TCRM20

- 629

463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20

- 636

464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system

465 Which authorization parameters are there

466 Where is the authorization profile defined

467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles

468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding

authorization

`

469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization

profile

TCRM20

- 641

470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role

(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)

TCRM20

- 648

471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links

472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links

473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link

474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role

475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role

476 What are the types of the WCLL

TCRM20

- 653

477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 655

478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)

479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs

480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the

different between them

TCRM20

- 669 ndash

673

481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view

the BTr Where is it defined

TCRM20

- 674

482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers

What purpose does it serve

483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based

484 What is BOL

485 What is a Genil What is its role

TCRM20

- 689

486 What is UI Component TCRM20

- 692

487 What is the model of the BSP

488 What the view of the BSP

489 What is the Controller of the BSP

TCRM20

- 694

490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the

concept

TCRM20

- 695

491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes

492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL

TCRM20

- 696

493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20

- 697

494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed

495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data

handling)

TCRM20

- 709

496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape

object it refers

497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users

TCRM20

- 732

498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key

role (5)

TCRM20

- 735

499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20

- 737

500 What is the role of the design layer

501 What is the purpose of the design layer

502 Where the design layer is logical positioned

503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are

linked to it

TCRM20

- 757

504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it

505 What is an Assignment

506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet

TCRM20

- 766

507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20

- 785

508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786

510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the

different elements

511 What are the processing restrictions

TCRM20

- 787

512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the

EEW What is the difference when creating a new table

TCRM20

- 788

513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different

between the EEW

514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)

TCRM20

- 812

515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and

which

TCRM20

- 812

516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW

517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI

518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are

not

TCRM20

- 821

519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW

when initiating a change

TCRM20

- 829

520 What is a component

521 What is the component enhancement concept

522 How does it work

523 What are the process elements when creating a new component

TCRM20

- 830

524

Question Page on

TCR

1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to

the SAP

2 What four other added values the system provides

TCRM10 -

26

3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)

4 What is the logic relation between them

5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)

TCRM10 -

27

6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)

7 What is the logic relation between them

8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)

TCRM10 -

28

9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)

10 What is the logic relation between them

TCRM10 -

29

11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -

30

12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

(8) 37

13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture

14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)

TCRM10 -

44

15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of

updates tare there

16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which

component do it What is the purpose of the verification

TCRM10 -

46

17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange

18 What is the role of the adapters

19 What is the CRM Adapter

20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas

TCRM10 -

47

21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)

22 What are the different components on the Application (3)

23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each

TCRM10 -

52

24 What is the purpose of the IC

25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)

TCRM10 -

53

26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile

users (3)

TCRM10 -

54

27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -

55

28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -

61

29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -

63

30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the

integration

31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing

TCRM10 -

80

32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan

33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)

34 What are the sub elements of a MP

35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)

36 What are the campaign characters (4)

37 What are the sub elements of a campaign

TCRM10 -

81

38 What is the meaning of segmentation

39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data

resources for each

40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers

41 What is the use of the attribute list

TCRM10 -

86

42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -

88

43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

group method

44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom

89

45 What is the activity TCRM10 -

95

46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign

47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned

TCRM10 -

96

48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)

49 How does is works (4)

50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management

51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM

TCRM10 -

108

52 What is the Process of TPM

53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of

each

TCRM10 -

109

54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -

118

55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -

119

56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -

120

57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)

58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding

E Service (7) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

133

59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -

135

60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may

perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

140

61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -

141

62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)

63 What is PRM

64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to

achieve it efficient How

TCRM10 -

150

65 What is eh concept of the PCM

66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)

TCRM10 -

151

67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management

68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each

(6)

TCRM10 -

153

69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

157

70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158

72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -

170

73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the

Business Partner integrate

TCRM10 -

171

74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -

178

75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -

179

76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose

77 Which processes it follows

78 What are its attributes (3)

TCRM10 -

188

79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -

189

80 What is the purpose of the activity Management

81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System

TCRM10 -

193

82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -

194

83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -

195

84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -

199

85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -

200

86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales

Methodology (4)

TCRM10 -

201

87 What are the initials PPM

88 What is the purpose of the tool

89 Who uses it and how (2)

TCRM10 -

201

90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -

207

91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -

208

92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to

maintain contracts

93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)

94 What is the relation between the contract and the order

TCRM10 -

218

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order

96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -

219

97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts

regarding work processes and updates (4)

TCRM10 -

220

98 What is the ICM What is his use

99 What are its business goals (3)

100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results

TCRM10 -

225

101 What are the main roles in an IC

102 What is the scratch pad

103 What is the Account info

104 What is the Alert

105 What is the Communication Information

106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers

107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system

TCRM10 -

231

108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM

109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)

TCRM10 -

232

110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be

integrated

TCRM10 -

233

111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -

234

112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the

knowledge search What are the results

TCRM10 -

235

113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)

114 What is an Interactive scripting

115 What is ERMS

116 What is the IDI

TCRM10 -

247

117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how

(3)

118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)

TCRM10 -

248

119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI

planned

120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting

121 What other IDI tools are there

TCRM10 -

249

122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of

creating a call list

TCRM10 -

250

123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)

124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)

TCRM10 -

251

125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -

257

126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 11: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc

306 What are the data sources used during the billing process

307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What

is included in each part and what are its parameters

308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding

Billing Documents

309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed

310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc

347 TCRM20

- 291

311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System

and on which cases do you use each one

312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process

348

313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the

use of each

314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool

is used for this purpose

315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting

349 TCRM20

- 292

316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan

317 Which kinds of billing plans are there

318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of

319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan

320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned

350 TCRM20

- 293

321 What is the Billing Unit

322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units

323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to

extract the information

324 To which system object is the BU assigned

351 TCRM20

- 296

325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document

326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system

Object is it defined

327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat

328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination

329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on

another document

330 What is the Billing Relevance

331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process

332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process

333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On

what is it based

352 TCRM20

- 298

334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the

ERP

335 How is it customized on the system

336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document

353 TCRM20

- 299

337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20

- 300

338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 302

339 What are the Middleware Objectives

340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his

features

341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW

connection in order to communicate with the CRM

374

375

TCRM20

- 321

342 What is the SMQ12

343 What is the TRFC

344 How the Queues are processed

345 What is the Scheduler

TCRM20

- 321

346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20

- 326

347 Where is the MW software installed

348 What is included in the CRM Server

349 What are the MW objectives (3)

TCRM20

- 327

350 Which technology runs the process 376

351 What is the Objective of the BDoc

352 What is a BDoc Type

353 What is a BDoc Instance

354 What is a BDoc message

355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc

377

378

TCRM20

- 350

356 Describe the out bounding Process

357 Describe the Inbounding Process

358 What is the use of the Queue

359 What is the administration console

360 What is the validation process

379

361 What is the Objective of the Object management

362 What is the use

363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs

380

364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and

what are the data transfer restrictions

365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and

the CRM

381

366 What is the objective of the data load

367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load

368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)

369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO

370 What is the delta Load

382

371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383

372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20

- 347

373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20

- 348

374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

responsibility of the Administration Console

375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc

376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc

377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc

386

378 What is the Data Integrity Manager

379 What is its use

387

380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and

relation between systems (6)

388

381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc

382 What are the options for debugging

391

383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the

SAP GUI

408

384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client

385 Which configuration tools are there

409

386 What are the different Business Roles (7)

387 Where are they defined

410

388 What are the different areas on the Screen

389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective

TCRM20

- 569

390 What is personalize

391 What is Help Center

392 What is System News

393 What is Central Search

TCRM20

- 570

394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20

- 571

395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles

396 To Which System Element we assign a User

411

397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412

398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR

399 What determines what will on the NB

413

400 What is the use of the Work Center

401 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 572

402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20

- 573

403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage

404 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 574

405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20

- 575

406 What is the use of the Calendar

407 What are the configuration options

TCRM20

- 576

408 Which system could be synched with the Email application

409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding

the Emails

410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which

logical links are there (4)

414 TCRM20

- 578

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center

412 What determines the Work Center

413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the

different between them

414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports

TCRM20

- 579

415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20

- 580

416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20

- 581

417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20

- 586

418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20

- 587

419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)

420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the

assignment block (4)

TCRM20

- 588

421 What is the second view possibility on the UI

422 For what is it used

423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view

424 Who may use this view

TCRM20

- 589

425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20

- 590

426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)

427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display

428 Give examples for Hierarchies

TCRM20

- 591

429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415

430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417

431 What is the role configuration key

432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key

419

433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench

434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed

by the EEWB

435 What is the user application of the EEWB

436 What is the advantage of the EEWB

437 What is the influence on other systems

421

438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422

439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20

- 613

440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each

441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user

442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model

TCRM20

- 615

443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)

444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links

445 What are the customization options of the NB profile

TCRM20

- 617

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

446 Where is the customization done

447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of

links

448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers

449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR

TCRM20

- 619

450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20

- 620

451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)

452 Where is it customized

TCRM20

- 622

453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are

they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the

influence of the layout profile on these links

TCRM20

- 623

454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples

455 Which types of function profile are there (4)

456 What determines the type of the functional profile

457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of

functional profile is it

TCRM20

- 624

458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR

459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org

unit position and user

TCRM20

- 626

460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20

- 627

461 What is the portal integration

462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the

CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal

TCRM20

- 629

463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20

- 636

464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system

465 Which authorization parameters are there

466 Where is the authorization profile defined

467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles

468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding

authorization

`

469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization

profile

TCRM20

- 641

470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role

(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)

TCRM20

- 648

471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links

472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links

473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link

474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role

475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role

476 What are the types of the WCLL

TCRM20

- 653

477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 655

478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)

479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs

480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the

different between them

TCRM20

- 669 ndash

673

481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view

the BTr Where is it defined

TCRM20

- 674

482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers

What purpose does it serve

483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based

484 What is BOL

485 What is a Genil What is its role

TCRM20

- 689

486 What is UI Component TCRM20

- 692

487 What is the model of the BSP

488 What the view of the BSP

489 What is the Controller of the BSP

TCRM20

- 694

490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the

concept

TCRM20

- 695

491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes

492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL

TCRM20

- 696

493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20

- 697

494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed

495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data

handling)

TCRM20

- 709

496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape

object it refers

497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users

TCRM20

- 732

498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key

role (5)

TCRM20

- 735

499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20

- 737

500 What is the role of the design layer

501 What is the purpose of the design layer

502 Where the design layer is logical positioned

503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are

linked to it

TCRM20

- 757

504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it

505 What is an Assignment

506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet

TCRM20

- 766

507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20

- 785

508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786

510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the

different elements

511 What are the processing restrictions

TCRM20

- 787

512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the

EEW What is the difference when creating a new table

TCRM20

- 788

513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different

between the EEW

514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)

TCRM20

- 812

515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and

which

TCRM20

- 812

516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW

517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI

518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are

not

TCRM20

- 821

519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW

when initiating a change

TCRM20

- 829

520 What is a component

521 What is the component enhancement concept

522 How does it work

523 What are the process elements when creating a new component

TCRM20

- 830

524

Question Page on

TCR

1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to

the SAP

2 What four other added values the system provides

TCRM10 -

26

3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)

4 What is the logic relation between them

5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)

TCRM10 -

27

6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)

7 What is the logic relation between them

8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)

TCRM10 -

28

9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)

10 What is the logic relation between them

TCRM10 -

29

11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -

30

12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

(8) 37

13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture

14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)

TCRM10 -

44

15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of

updates tare there

16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which

component do it What is the purpose of the verification

TCRM10 -

46

17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange

18 What is the role of the adapters

19 What is the CRM Adapter

20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas

TCRM10 -

47

21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)

22 What are the different components on the Application (3)

23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each

TCRM10 -

52

24 What is the purpose of the IC

25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)

TCRM10 -

53

26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile

users (3)

TCRM10 -

54

27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -

55

28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -

61

29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -

63

30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the

integration

31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing

TCRM10 -

80

32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan

33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)

34 What are the sub elements of a MP

35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)

36 What are the campaign characters (4)

37 What are the sub elements of a campaign

TCRM10 -

81

38 What is the meaning of segmentation

39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data

resources for each

40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers

41 What is the use of the attribute list

TCRM10 -

86

42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -

88

43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

group method

44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom

89

45 What is the activity TCRM10 -

95

46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign

47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned

TCRM10 -

96

48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)

49 How does is works (4)

50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management

51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM

TCRM10 -

108

52 What is the Process of TPM

53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of

each

TCRM10 -

109

54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -

118

55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -

119

56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -

120

57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)

58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding

E Service (7) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

133

59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -

135

60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may

perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

140

61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -

141

62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)

63 What is PRM

64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to

achieve it efficient How

TCRM10 -

150

65 What is eh concept of the PCM

66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)

TCRM10 -

151

67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management

68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each

(6)

TCRM10 -

153

69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

157

70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158

72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -

170

73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the

Business Partner integrate

TCRM10 -

171

74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -

178

75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -

179

76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose

77 Which processes it follows

78 What are its attributes (3)

TCRM10 -

188

79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -

189

80 What is the purpose of the activity Management

81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System

TCRM10 -

193

82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -

194

83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -

195

84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -

199

85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -

200

86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales

Methodology (4)

TCRM10 -

201

87 What are the initials PPM

88 What is the purpose of the tool

89 Who uses it and how (2)

TCRM10 -

201

90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -

207

91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -

208

92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to

maintain contracts

93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)

94 What is the relation between the contract and the order

TCRM10 -

218

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order

96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -

219

97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts

regarding work processes and updates (4)

TCRM10 -

220

98 What is the ICM What is his use

99 What are its business goals (3)

100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results

TCRM10 -

225

101 What are the main roles in an IC

102 What is the scratch pad

103 What is the Account info

104 What is the Alert

105 What is the Communication Information

106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers

107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system

TCRM10 -

231

108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM

109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)

TCRM10 -

232

110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be

integrated

TCRM10 -

233

111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -

234

112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the

knowledge search What are the results

TCRM10 -

235

113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)

114 What is an Interactive scripting

115 What is ERMS

116 What is the IDI

TCRM10 -

247

117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how

(3)

118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)

TCRM10 -

248

119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI

planned

120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting

121 What other IDI tools are there

TCRM10 -

249

122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of

creating a call list

TCRM10 -

250

123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)

124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)

TCRM10 -

251

125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -

257

126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 12: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 302

339 What are the Middleware Objectives

340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his

features

341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW

connection in order to communicate with the CRM

374

375

TCRM20

- 321

342 What is the SMQ12

343 What is the TRFC

344 How the Queues are processed

345 What is the Scheduler

TCRM20

- 321

346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20

- 326

347 Where is the MW software installed

348 What is included in the CRM Server

349 What are the MW objectives (3)

TCRM20

- 327

350 Which technology runs the process 376

351 What is the Objective of the BDoc

352 What is a BDoc Type

353 What is a BDoc Instance

354 What is a BDoc message

355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc

377

378

TCRM20

- 350

356 Describe the out bounding Process

357 Describe the Inbounding Process

358 What is the use of the Queue

359 What is the administration console

360 What is the validation process

379

361 What is the Objective of the Object management

362 What is the use

363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs

380

364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and

what are the data transfer restrictions

365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and

the CRM

381

366 What is the objective of the data load

367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load

368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)

369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO

370 What is the delta Load

382

371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383

372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20

- 347

373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20

- 348

374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

responsibility of the Administration Console

375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc

376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc

377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc

386

378 What is the Data Integrity Manager

379 What is its use

387

380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and

relation between systems (6)

388

381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc

382 What are the options for debugging

391

383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the

SAP GUI

408

384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client

385 Which configuration tools are there

409

386 What are the different Business Roles (7)

387 Where are they defined

410

388 What are the different areas on the Screen

389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective

TCRM20

- 569

390 What is personalize

391 What is Help Center

392 What is System News

393 What is Central Search

TCRM20

- 570

394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20

- 571

395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles

396 To Which System Element we assign a User

411

397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412

398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR

399 What determines what will on the NB

413

400 What is the use of the Work Center

401 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 572

402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20

- 573

403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage

404 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 574

405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20

- 575

406 What is the use of the Calendar

407 What are the configuration options

TCRM20

- 576

408 Which system could be synched with the Email application

409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding

the Emails

410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which

logical links are there (4)

414 TCRM20

- 578

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center

412 What determines the Work Center

413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the

different between them

414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports

TCRM20

- 579

415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20

- 580

416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20

- 581

417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20

- 586

418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20

- 587

419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)

420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the

assignment block (4)

TCRM20

- 588

421 What is the second view possibility on the UI

422 For what is it used

423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view

424 Who may use this view

TCRM20

- 589

425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20

- 590

426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)

427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display

428 Give examples for Hierarchies

TCRM20

- 591

429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415

430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417

431 What is the role configuration key

432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key

419

433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench

434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed

by the EEWB

435 What is the user application of the EEWB

436 What is the advantage of the EEWB

437 What is the influence on other systems

421

438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422

439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20

- 613

440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each

441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user

442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model

TCRM20

- 615

443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)

444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links

445 What are the customization options of the NB profile

TCRM20

- 617

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

446 Where is the customization done

447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of

links

448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers

449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR

TCRM20

- 619

450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20

- 620

451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)

452 Where is it customized

TCRM20

- 622

453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are

they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the

influence of the layout profile on these links

TCRM20

- 623

454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples

455 Which types of function profile are there (4)

456 What determines the type of the functional profile

457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of

functional profile is it

TCRM20

- 624

458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR

459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org

unit position and user

TCRM20

- 626

460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20

- 627

461 What is the portal integration

462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the

CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal

TCRM20

- 629

463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20

- 636

464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system

465 Which authorization parameters are there

466 Where is the authorization profile defined

467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles

468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding

authorization

`

469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization

profile

TCRM20

- 641

470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role

(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)

TCRM20

- 648

471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links

472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links

473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link

474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role

475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role

476 What are the types of the WCLL

TCRM20

- 653

477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 655

478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)

479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs

480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the

different between them

TCRM20

- 669 ndash

673

481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view

the BTr Where is it defined

TCRM20

- 674

482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers

What purpose does it serve

483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based

484 What is BOL

485 What is a Genil What is its role

TCRM20

- 689

486 What is UI Component TCRM20

- 692

487 What is the model of the BSP

488 What the view of the BSP

489 What is the Controller of the BSP

TCRM20

- 694

490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the

concept

TCRM20

- 695

491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes

492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL

TCRM20

- 696

493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20

- 697

494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed

495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data

handling)

TCRM20

- 709

496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape

object it refers

497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users

TCRM20

- 732

498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key

role (5)

TCRM20

- 735

499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20

- 737

500 What is the role of the design layer

501 What is the purpose of the design layer

502 Where the design layer is logical positioned

503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are

linked to it

TCRM20

- 757

504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it

505 What is an Assignment

506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet

TCRM20

- 766

507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20

- 785

508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786

510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the

different elements

511 What are the processing restrictions

TCRM20

- 787

512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the

EEW What is the difference when creating a new table

TCRM20

- 788

513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different

between the EEW

514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)

TCRM20

- 812

515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and

which

TCRM20

- 812

516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW

517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI

518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are

not

TCRM20

- 821

519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW

when initiating a change

TCRM20

- 829

520 What is a component

521 What is the component enhancement concept

522 How does it work

523 What are the process elements when creating a new component

TCRM20

- 830

524

Question Page on

TCR

1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to

the SAP

2 What four other added values the system provides

TCRM10 -

26

3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)

4 What is the logic relation between them

5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)

TCRM10 -

27

6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)

7 What is the logic relation between them

8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)

TCRM10 -

28

9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)

10 What is the logic relation between them

TCRM10 -

29

11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -

30

12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

(8) 37

13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture

14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)

TCRM10 -

44

15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of

updates tare there

16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which

component do it What is the purpose of the verification

TCRM10 -

46

17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange

18 What is the role of the adapters

19 What is the CRM Adapter

20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas

TCRM10 -

47

21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)

22 What are the different components on the Application (3)

23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each

TCRM10 -

52

24 What is the purpose of the IC

25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)

TCRM10 -

53

26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile

users (3)

TCRM10 -

54

27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -

55

28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -

61

29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -

63

30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the

integration

31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing

TCRM10 -

80

32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan

33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)

34 What are the sub elements of a MP

35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)

36 What are the campaign characters (4)

37 What are the sub elements of a campaign

TCRM10 -

81

38 What is the meaning of segmentation

39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data

resources for each

40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers

41 What is the use of the attribute list

TCRM10 -

86

42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -

88

43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

group method

44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom

89

45 What is the activity TCRM10 -

95

46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign

47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned

TCRM10 -

96

48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)

49 How does is works (4)

50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management

51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM

TCRM10 -

108

52 What is the Process of TPM

53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of

each

TCRM10 -

109

54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -

118

55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -

119

56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -

120

57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)

58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding

E Service (7) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

133

59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -

135

60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may

perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

140

61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -

141

62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)

63 What is PRM

64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to

achieve it efficient How

TCRM10 -

150

65 What is eh concept of the PCM

66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)

TCRM10 -

151

67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management

68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each

(6)

TCRM10 -

153

69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

157

70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158

72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -

170

73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the

Business Partner integrate

TCRM10 -

171

74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -

178

75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -

179

76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose

77 Which processes it follows

78 What are its attributes (3)

TCRM10 -

188

79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -

189

80 What is the purpose of the activity Management

81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System

TCRM10 -

193

82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -

194

83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -

195

84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -

199

85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -

200

86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales

Methodology (4)

TCRM10 -

201

87 What are the initials PPM

88 What is the purpose of the tool

89 Who uses it and how (2)

TCRM10 -

201

90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -

207

91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -

208

92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to

maintain contracts

93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)

94 What is the relation between the contract and the order

TCRM10 -

218

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order

96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -

219

97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts

regarding work processes and updates (4)

TCRM10 -

220

98 What is the ICM What is his use

99 What are its business goals (3)

100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results

TCRM10 -

225

101 What are the main roles in an IC

102 What is the scratch pad

103 What is the Account info

104 What is the Alert

105 What is the Communication Information

106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers

107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system

TCRM10 -

231

108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM

109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)

TCRM10 -

232

110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be

integrated

TCRM10 -

233

111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -

234

112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the

knowledge search What are the results

TCRM10 -

235

113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)

114 What is an Interactive scripting

115 What is ERMS

116 What is the IDI

TCRM10 -

247

117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how

(3)

118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)

TCRM10 -

248

119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI

planned

120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting

121 What other IDI tools are there

TCRM10 -

249

122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of

creating a call list

TCRM10 -

250

123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)

124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)

TCRM10 -

251

125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -

257

126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 13: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

responsibility of the Administration Console

375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc

376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc

377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc

386

378 What is the Data Integrity Manager

379 What is its use

387

380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and

relation between systems (6)

388

381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc

382 What are the options for debugging

391

383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the

SAP GUI

408

384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client

385 Which configuration tools are there

409

386 What are the different Business Roles (7)

387 Where are they defined

410

388 What are the different areas on the Screen

389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective

TCRM20

- 569

390 What is personalize

391 What is Help Center

392 What is System News

393 What is Central Search

TCRM20

- 570

394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20

- 571

395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles

396 To Which System Element we assign a User

411

397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412

398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR

399 What determines what will on the NB

413

400 What is the use of the Work Center

401 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 572

402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20

- 573

403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage

404 To which System Object is it assigned

TCRM20

- 574

405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20

- 575

406 What is the use of the Calendar

407 What are the configuration options

TCRM20

- 576

408 Which system could be synched with the Email application

409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding

the Emails

410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which

logical links are there (4)

414 TCRM20

- 578

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center

412 What determines the Work Center

413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the

different between them

414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports

TCRM20

- 579

415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20

- 580

416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20

- 581

417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20

- 586

418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20

- 587

419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)

420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the

assignment block (4)

TCRM20

- 588

421 What is the second view possibility on the UI

422 For what is it used

423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view

424 Who may use this view

TCRM20

- 589

425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20

- 590

426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)

427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display

428 Give examples for Hierarchies

TCRM20

- 591

429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415

430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417

431 What is the role configuration key

432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key

419

433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench

434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed

by the EEWB

435 What is the user application of the EEWB

436 What is the advantage of the EEWB

437 What is the influence on other systems

421

438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422

439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20

- 613

440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each

441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user

442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model

TCRM20

- 615

443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)

444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links

445 What are the customization options of the NB profile

TCRM20

- 617

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

446 Where is the customization done

447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of

links

448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers

449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR

TCRM20

- 619

450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20

- 620

451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)

452 Where is it customized

TCRM20

- 622

453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are

they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the

influence of the layout profile on these links

TCRM20

- 623

454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples

455 Which types of function profile are there (4)

456 What determines the type of the functional profile

457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of

functional profile is it

TCRM20

- 624

458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR

459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org

unit position and user

TCRM20

- 626

460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20

- 627

461 What is the portal integration

462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the

CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal

TCRM20

- 629

463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20

- 636

464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system

465 Which authorization parameters are there

466 Where is the authorization profile defined

467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles

468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding

authorization

`

469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization

profile

TCRM20

- 641

470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role

(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)

TCRM20

- 648

471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links

472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links

473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link

474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role

475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role

476 What are the types of the WCLL

TCRM20

- 653

477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 655

478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)

479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs

480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the

different between them

TCRM20

- 669 ndash

673

481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view

the BTr Where is it defined

TCRM20

- 674

482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers

What purpose does it serve

483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based

484 What is BOL

485 What is a Genil What is its role

TCRM20

- 689

486 What is UI Component TCRM20

- 692

487 What is the model of the BSP

488 What the view of the BSP

489 What is the Controller of the BSP

TCRM20

- 694

490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the

concept

TCRM20

- 695

491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes

492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL

TCRM20

- 696

493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20

- 697

494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed

495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data

handling)

TCRM20

- 709

496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape

object it refers

497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users

TCRM20

- 732

498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key

role (5)

TCRM20

- 735

499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20

- 737

500 What is the role of the design layer

501 What is the purpose of the design layer

502 Where the design layer is logical positioned

503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are

linked to it

TCRM20

- 757

504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it

505 What is an Assignment

506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet

TCRM20

- 766

507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20

- 785

508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786

510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the

different elements

511 What are the processing restrictions

TCRM20

- 787

512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the

EEW What is the difference when creating a new table

TCRM20

- 788

513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different

between the EEW

514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)

TCRM20

- 812

515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and

which

TCRM20

- 812

516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW

517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI

518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are

not

TCRM20

- 821

519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW

when initiating a change

TCRM20

- 829

520 What is a component

521 What is the component enhancement concept

522 How does it work

523 What are the process elements when creating a new component

TCRM20

- 830

524

Question Page on

TCR

1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to

the SAP

2 What four other added values the system provides

TCRM10 -

26

3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)

4 What is the logic relation between them

5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)

TCRM10 -

27

6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)

7 What is the logic relation between them

8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)

TCRM10 -

28

9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)

10 What is the logic relation between them

TCRM10 -

29

11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -

30

12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

(8) 37

13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture

14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)

TCRM10 -

44

15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of

updates tare there

16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which

component do it What is the purpose of the verification

TCRM10 -

46

17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange

18 What is the role of the adapters

19 What is the CRM Adapter

20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas

TCRM10 -

47

21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)

22 What are the different components on the Application (3)

23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each

TCRM10 -

52

24 What is the purpose of the IC

25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)

TCRM10 -

53

26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile

users (3)

TCRM10 -

54

27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -

55

28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -

61

29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -

63

30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the

integration

31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing

TCRM10 -

80

32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan

33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)

34 What are the sub elements of a MP

35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)

36 What are the campaign characters (4)

37 What are the sub elements of a campaign

TCRM10 -

81

38 What is the meaning of segmentation

39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data

resources for each

40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers

41 What is the use of the attribute list

TCRM10 -

86

42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -

88

43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

group method

44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom

89

45 What is the activity TCRM10 -

95

46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign

47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned

TCRM10 -

96

48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)

49 How does is works (4)

50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management

51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM

TCRM10 -

108

52 What is the Process of TPM

53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of

each

TCRM10 -

109

54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -

118

55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -

119

56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -

120

57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)

58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding

E Service (7) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

133

59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -

135

60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may

perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

140

61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -

141

62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)

63 What is PRM

64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to

achieve it efficient How

TCRM10 -

150

65 What is eh concept of the PCM

66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)

TCRM10 -

151

67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management

68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each

(6)

TCRM10 -

153

69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

157

70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158

72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -

170

73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the

Business Partner integrate

TCRM10 -

171

74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -

178

75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -

179

76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose

77 Which processes it follows

78 What are its attributes (3)

TCRM10 -

188

79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -

189

80 What is the purpose of the activity Management

81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System

TCRM10 -

193

82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -

194

83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -

195

84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -

199

85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -

200

86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales

Methodology (4)

TCRM10 -

201

87 What are the initials PPM

88 What is the purpose of the tool

89 Who uses it and how (2)

TCRM10 -

201

90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -

207

91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -

208

92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to

maintain contracts

93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)

94 What is the relation between the contract and the order

TCRM10 -

218

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order

96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -

219

97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts

regarding work processes and updates (4)

TCRM10 -

220

98 What is the ICM What is his use

99 What are its business goals (3)

100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results

TCRM10 -

225

101 What are the main roles in an IC

102 What is the scratch pad

103 What is the Account info

104 What is the Alert

105 What is the Communication Information

106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers

107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system

TCRM10 -

231

108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM

109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)

TCRM10 -

232

110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be

integrated

TCRM10 -

233

111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -

234

112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the

knowledge search What are the results

TCRM10 -

235

113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)

114 What is an Interactive scripting

115 What is ERMS

116 What is the IDI

TCRM10 -

247

117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how

(3)

118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)

TCRM10 -

248

119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI

planned

120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting

121 What other IDI tools are there

TCRM10 -

249

122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of

creating a call list

TCRM10 -

250

123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)

124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)

TCRM10 -

251

125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -

257

126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 14: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center

412 What determines the Work Center

413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the

different between them

414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports

TCRM20

- 579

415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20

- 580

416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20

- 581

417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20

- 586

418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20

- 587

419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)

420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the

assignment block (4)

TCRM20

- 588

421 What is the second view possibility on the UI

422 For what is it used

423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view

424 Who may use this view

TCRM20

- 589

425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20

- 590

426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)

427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display

428 Give examples for Hierarchies

TCRM20

- 591

429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415

430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417

431 What is the role configuration key

432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key

419

433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench

434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed

by the EEWB

435 What is the user application of the EEWB

436 What is the advantage of the EEWB

437 What is the influence on other systems

421

438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422

439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20

- 613

440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each

441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user

442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model

TCRM20

- 615

443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)

444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links

445 What are the customization options of the NB profile

TCRM20

- 617

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

446 Where is the customization done

447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of

links

448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers

449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR

TCRM20

- 619

450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20

- 620

451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)

452 Where is it customized

TCRM20

- 622

453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are

they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the

influence of the layout profile on these links

TCRM20

- 623

454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples

455 Which types of function profile are there (4)

456 What determines the type of the functional profile

457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of

functional profile is it

TCRM20

- 624

458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR

459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org

unit position and user

TCRM20

- 626

460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20

- 627

461 What is the portal integration

462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the

CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal

TCRM20

- 629

463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20

- 636

464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system

465 Which authorization parameters are there

466 Where is the authorization profile defined

467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles

468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding

authorization

`

469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization

profile

TCRM20

- 641

470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role

(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)

TCRM20

- 648

471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links

472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links

473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link

474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role

475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role

476 What are the types of the WCLL

TCRM20

- 653

477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 655

478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)

479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs

480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the

different between them

TCRM20

- 669 ndash

673

481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view

the BTr Where is it defined

TCRM20

- 674

482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers

What purpose does it serve

483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based

484 What is BOL

485 What is a Genil What is its role

TCRM20

- 689

486 What is UI Component TCRM20

- 692

487 What is the model of the BSP

488 What the view of the BSP

489 What is the Controller of the BSP

TCRM20

- 694

490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the

concept

TCRM20

- 695

491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes

492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL

TCRM20

- 696

493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20

- 697

494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed

495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data

handling)

TCRM20

- 709

496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape

object it refers

497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users

TCRM20

- 732

498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key

role (5)

TCRM20

- 735

499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20

- 737

500 What is the role of the design layer

501 What is the purpose of the design layer

502 Where the design layer is logical positioned

503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are

linked to it

TCRM20

- 757

504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it

505 What is an Assignment

506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet

TCRM20

- 766

507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20

- 785

508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786

510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the

different elements

511 What are the processing restrictions

TCRM20

- 787

512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the

EEW What is the difference when creating a new table

TCRM20

- 788

513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different

between the EEW

514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)

TCRM20

- 812

515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and

which

TCRM20

- 812

516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW

517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI

518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are

not

TCRM20

- 821

519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW

when initiating a change

TCRM20

- 829

520 What is a component

521 What is the component enhancement concept

522 How does it work

523 What are the process elements when creating a new component

TCRM20

- 830

524

Question Page on

TCR

1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to

the SAP

2 What four other added values the system provides

TCRM10 -

26

3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)

4 What is the logic relation between them

5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)

TCRM10 -

27

6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)

7 What is the logic relation between them

8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)

TCRM10 -

28

9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)

10 What is the logic relation between them

TCRM10 -

29

11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -

30

12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

(8) 37

13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture

14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)

TCRM10 -

44

15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of

updates tare there

16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which

component do it What is the purpose of the verification

TCRM10 -

46

17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange

18 What is the role of the adapters

19 What is the CRM Adapter

20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas

TCRM10 -

47

21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)

22 What are the different components on the Application (3)

23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each

TCRM10 -

52

24 What is the purpose of the IC

25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)

TCRM10 -

53

26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile

users (3)

TCRM10 -

54

27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -

55

28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -

61

29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -

63

30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the

integration

31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing

TCRM10 -

80

32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan

33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)

34 What are the sub elements of a MP

35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)

36 What are the campaign characters (4)

37 What are the sub elements of a campaign

TCRM10 -

81

38 What is the meaning of segmentation

39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data

resources for each

40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers

41 What is the use of the attribute list

TCRM10 -

86

42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -

88

43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

group method

44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom

89

45 What is the activity TCRM10 -

95

46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign

47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned

TCRM10 -

96

48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)

49 How does is works (4)

50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management

51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM

TCRM10 -

108

52 What is the Process of TPM

53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of

each

TCRM10 -

109

54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -

118

55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -

119

56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -

120

57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)

58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding

E Service (7) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

133

59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -

135

60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may

perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

140

61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -

141

62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)

63 What is PRM

64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to

achieve it efficient How

TCRM10 -

150

65 What is eh concept of the PCM

66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)

TCRM10 -

151

67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management

68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each

(6)

TCRM10 -

153

69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

157

70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158

72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -

170

73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the

Business Partner integrate

TCRM10 -

171

74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -

178

75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -

179

76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose

77 Which processes it follows

78 What are its attributes (3)

TCRM10 -

188

79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -

189

80 What is the purpose of the activity Management

81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System

TCRM10 -

193

82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -

194

83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -

195

84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -

199

85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -

200

86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales

Methodology (4)

TCRM10 -

201

87 What are the initials PPM

88 What is the purpose of the tool

89 Who uses it and how (2)

TCRM10 -

201

90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -

207

91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -

208

92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to

maintain contracts

93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)

94 What is the relation between the contract and the order

TCRM10 -

218

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order

96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -

219

97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts

regarding work processes and updates (4)

TCRM10 -

220

98 What is the ICM What is his use

99 What are its business goals (3)

100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results

TCRM10 -

225

101 What are the main roles in an IC

102 What is the scratch pad

103 What is the Account info

104 What is the Alert

105 What is the Communication Information

106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers

107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system

TCRM10 -

231

108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM

109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)

TCRM10 -

232

110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be

integrated

TCRM10 -

233

111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -

234

112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the

knowledge search What are the results

TCRM10 -

235

113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)

114 What is an Interactive scripting

115 What is ERMS

116 What is the IDI

TCRM10 -

247

117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how

(3)

118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)

TCRM10 -

248

119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI

planned

120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting

121 What other IDI tools are there

TCRM10 -

249

122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of

creating a call list

TCRM10 -

250

123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)

124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)

TCRM10 -

251

125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -

257

126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 15: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

446 Where is the customization done

447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of

links

448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers

449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR

TCRM20

- 619

450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20

- 620

451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)

452 Where is it customized

TCRM20

- 622

453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are

they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the

influence of the layout profile on these links

TCRM20

- 623

454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples

455 Which types of function profile are there (4)

456 What determines the type of the functional profile

457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of

functional profile is it

TCRM20

- 624

458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR

459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org

unit position and user

TCRM20

- 626

460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20

- 627

461 What is the portal integration

462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the

CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal

TCRM20

- 629

463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20

- 636

464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system

465 Which authorization parameters are there

466 Where is the authorization profile defined

467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles

468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding

authorization

`

469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization

profile

TCRM20

- 641

470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role

(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)

TCRM20

- 648

471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links

472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links

473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link

474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role

475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role

476 What are the types of the WCLL

TCRM20

- 653

477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 655

478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)

479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs

480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the

different between them

TCRM20

- 669 ndash

673

481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view

the BTr Where is it defined

TCRM20

- 674

482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers

What purpose does it serve

483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based

484 What is BOL

485 What is a Genil What is its role

TCRM20

- 689

486 What is UI Component TCRM20

- 692

487 What is the model of the BSP

488 What the view of the BSP

489 What is the Controller of the BSP

TCRM20

- 694

490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the

concept

TCRM20

- 695

491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes

492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL

TCRM20

- 696

493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20

- 697

494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed

495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data

handling)

TCRM20

- 709

496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape

object it refers

497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users

TCRM20

- 732

498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key

role (5)

TCRM20

- 735

499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20

- 737

500 What is the role of the design layer

501 What is the purpose of the design layer

502 Where the design layer is logical positioned

503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are

linked to it

TCRM20

- 757

504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it

505 What is an Assignment

506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet

TCRM20

- 766

507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20

- 785

508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786

510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the

different elements

511 What are the processing restrictions

TCRM20

- 787

512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the

EEW What is the difference when creating a new table

TCRM20

- 788

513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different

between the EEW

514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)

TCRM20

- 812

515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and

which

TCRM20

- 812

516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW

517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI

518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are

not

TCRM20

- 821

519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW

when initiating a change

TCRM20

- 829

520 What is a component

521 What is the component enhancement concept

522 How does it work

523 What are the process elements when creating a new component

TCRM20

- 830

524

Question Page on

TCR

1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to

the SAP

2 What four other added values the system provides

TCRM10 -

26

3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)

4 What is the logic relation between them

5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)

TCRM10 -

27

6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)

7 What is the logic relation between them

8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)

TCRM10 -

28

9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)

10 What is the logic relation between them

TCRM10 -

29

11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -

30

12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

(8) 37

13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture

14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)

TCRM10 -

44

15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of

updates tare there

16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which

component do it What is the purpose of the verification

TCRM10 -

46

17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange

18 What is the role of the adapters

19 What is the CRM Adapter

20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas

TCRM10 -

47

21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)

22 What are the different components on the Application (3)

23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each

TCRM10 -

52

24 What is the purpose of the IC

25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)

TCRM10 -

53

26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile

users (3)

TCRM10 -

54

27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -

55

28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -

61

29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -

63

30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the

integration

31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing

TCRM10 -

80

32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan

33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)

34 What are the sub elements of a MP

35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)

36 What are the campaign characters (4)

37 What are the sub elements of a campaign

TCRM10 -

81

38 What is the meaning of segmentation

39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data

resources for each

40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers

41 What is the use of the attribute list

TCRM10 -

86

42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -

88

43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

group method

44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom

89

45 What is the activity TCRM10 -

95

46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign

47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned

TCRM10 -

96

48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)

49 How does is works (4)

50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management

51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM

TCRM10 -

108

52 What is the Process of TPM

53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of

each

TCRM10 -

109

54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -

118

55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -

119

56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -

120

57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)

58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding

E Service (7) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

133

59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -

135

60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may

perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

140

61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -

141

62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)

63 What is PRM

64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to

achieve it efficient How

TCRM10 -

150

65 What is eh concept of the PCM

66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)

TCRM10 -

151

67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management

68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each

(6)

TCRM10 -

153

69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

157

70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158

72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -

170

73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the

Business Partner integrate

TCRM10 -

171

74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -

178

75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -

179

76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose

77 Which processes it follows

78 What are its attributes (3)

TCRM10 -

188

79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -

189

80 What is the purpose of the activity Management

81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System

TCRM10 -

193

82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -

194

83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -

195

84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -

199

85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -

200

86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales

Methodology (4)

TCRM10 -

201

87 What are the initials PPM

88 What is the purpose of the tool

89 Who uses it and how (2)

TCRM10 -

201

90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -

207

91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -

208

92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to

maintain contracts

93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)

94 What is the relation between the contract and the order

TCRM10 -

218

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order

96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -

219

97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts

regarding work processes and updates (4)

TCRM10 -

220

98 What is the ICM What is his use

99 What are its business goals (3)

100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results

TCRM10 -

225

101 What are the main roles in an IC

102 What is the scratch pad

103 What is the Account info

104 What is the Alert

105 What is the Communication Information

106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers

107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system

TCRM10 -

231

108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM

109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)

TCRM10 -

232

110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be

integrated

TCRM10 -

233

111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -

234

112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the

knowledge search What are the results

TCRM10 -

235

113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)

114 What is an Interactive scripting

115 What is ERMS

116 What is the IDI

TCRM10 -

247

117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how

(3)

118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)

TCRM10 -

248

119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI

planned

120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting

121 What other IDI tools are there

TCRM10 -

249

122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of

creating a call list

TCRM10 -

250

123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)

124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)

TCRM10 -

251

125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -

257

126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 16: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

- 655

478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)

479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs

480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the

different between them

TCRM20

- 669 ndash

673

481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view

the BTr Where is it defined

TCRM20

- 674

482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers

What purpose does it serve

483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based

484 What is BOL

485 What is a Genil What is its role

TCRM20

- 689

486 What is UI Component TCRM20

- 692

487 What is the model of the BSP

488 What the view of the BSP

489 What is the Controller of the BSP

TCRM20

- 694

490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the

concept

TCRM20

- 695

491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes

492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL

TCRM20

- 696

493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20

- 697

494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed

495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data

handling)

TCRM20

- 709

496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape

object it refers

497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users

TCRM20

- 732

498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key

role (5)

TCRM20

- 735

499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20

- 737

500 What is the role of the design layer

501 What is the purpose of the design layer

502 Where the design layer is logical positioned

503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are

linked to it

TCRM20

- 757

504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it

505 What is an Assignment

506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet

TCRM20

- 766

507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20

- 785

508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786

510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the

different elements

511 What are the processing restrictions

TCRM20

- 787

512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the

EEW What is the difference when creating a new table

TCRM20

- 788

513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different

between the EEW

514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)

TCRM20

- 812

515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and

which

TCRM20

- 812

516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW

517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI

518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are

not

TCRM20

- 821

519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW

when initiating a change

TCRM20

- 829

520 What is a component

521 What is the component enhancement concept

522 How does it work

523 What are the process elements when creating a new component

TCRM20

- 830

524

Question Page on

TCR

1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to

the SAP

2 What four other added values the system provides

TCRM10 -

26

3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)

4 What is the logic relation between them

5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)

TCRM10 -

27

6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)

7 What is the logic relation between them

8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)

TCRM10 -

28

9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)

10 What is the logic relation between them

TCRM10 -

29

11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -

30

12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

(8) 37

13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture

14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)

TCRM10 -

44

15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of

updates tare there

16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which

component do it What is the purpose of the verification

TCRM10 -

46

17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange

18 What is the role of the adapters

19 What is the CRM Adapter

20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas

TCRM10 -

47

21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)

22 What are the different components on the Application (3)

23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each

TCRM10 -

52

24 What is the purpose of the IC

25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)

TCRM10 -

53

26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile

users (3)

TCRM10 -

54

27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -

55

28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -

61

29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -

63

30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the

integration

31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing

TCRM10 -

80

32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan

33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)

34 What are the sub elements of a MP

35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)

36 What are the campaign characters (4)

37 What are the sub elements of a campaign

TCRM10 -

81

38 What is the meaning of segmentation

39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data

resources for each

40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers

41 What is the use of the attribute list

TCRM10 -

86

42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -

88

43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

group method

44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom

89

45 What is the activity TCRM10 -

95

46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign

47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned

TCRM10 -

96

48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)

49 How does is works (4)

50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management

51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM

TCRM10 -

108

52 What is the Process of TPM

53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of

each

TCRM10 -

109

54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -

118

55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -

119

56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -

120

57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)

58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding

E Service (7) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

133

59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -

135

60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may

perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

140

61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -

141

62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)

63 What is PRM

64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to

achieve it efficient How

TCRM10 -

150

65 What is eh concept of the PCM

66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)

TCRM10 -

151

67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management

68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each

(6)

TCRM10 -

153

69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

157

70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158

72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -

170

73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the

Business Partner integrate

TCRM10 -

171

74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -

178

75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -

179

76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose

77 Which processes it follows

78 What are its attributes (3)

TCRM10 -

188

79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -

189

80 What is the purpose of the activity Management

81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System

TCRM10 -

193

82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -

194

83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -

195

84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -

199

85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -

200

86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales

Methodology (4)

TCRM10 -

201

87 What are the initials PPM

88 What is the purpose of the tool

89 Who uses it and how (2)

TCRM10 -

201

90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -

207

91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -

208

92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to

maintain contracts

93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)

94 What is the relation between the contract and the order

TCRM10 -

218

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order

96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -

219

97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts

regarding work processes and updates (4)

TCRM10 -

220

98 What is the ICM What is his use

99 What are its business goals (3)

100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results

TCRM10 -

225

101 What are the main roles in an IC

102 What is the scratch pad

103 What is the Account info

104 What is the Alert

105 What is the Communication Information

106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers

107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system

TCRM10 -

231

108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM

109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)

TCRM10 -

232

110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be

integrated

TCRM10 -

233

111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -

234

112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the

knowledge search What are the results

TCRM10 -

235

113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)

114 What is an Interactive scripting

115 What is ERMS

116 What is the IDI

TCRM10 -

247

117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how

(3)

118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)

TCRM10 -

248

119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI

planned

120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting

121 What other IDI tools are there

TCRM10 -

249

122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of

creating a call list

TCRM10 -

250

123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)

124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)

TCRM10 -

251

125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -

257

126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 17: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Question Page

on

CR100

Page on

TCRM

509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786

510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the

different elements

511 What are the processing restrictions

TCRM20

- 787

512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the

EEW What is the difference when creating a new table

TCRM20

- 788

513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different

between the EEW

514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)

TCRM20

- 812

515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and

which

TCRM20

- 812

516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW

517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI

518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are

not

TCRM20

- 821

519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW

when initiating a change

TCRM20

- 829

520 What is a component

521 What is the component enhancement concept

522 How does it work

523 What are the process elements when creating a new component

TCRM20

- 830

524

Question Page on

TCR

1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to

the SAP

2 What four other added values the system provides

TCRM10 -

26

3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)

4 What is the logic relation between them

5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)

TCRM10 -

27

6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)

7 What is the logic relation between them

8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)

TCRM10 -

28

9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)

10 What is the logic relation between them

TCRM10 -

29

11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -

30

12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

(8) 37

13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture

14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)

TCRM10 -

44

15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of

updates tare there

16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which

component do it What is the purpose of the verification

TCRM10 -

46

17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange

18 What is the role of the adapters

19 What is the CRM Adapter

20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas

TCRM10 -

47

21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)

22 What are the different components on the Application (3)

23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each

TCRM10 -

52

24 What is the purpose of the IC

25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)

TCRM10 -

53

26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile

users (3)

TCRM10 -

54

27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -

55

28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -

61

29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -

63

30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the

integration

31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing

TCRM10 -

80

32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan

33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)

34 What are the sub elements of a MP

35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)

36 What are the campaign characters (4)

37 What are the sub elements of a campaign

TCRM10 -

81

38 What is the meaning of segmentation

39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data

resources for each

40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers

41 What is the use of the attribute list

TCRM10 -

86

42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -

88

43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

group method

44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom

89

45 What is the activity TCRM10 -

95

46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign

47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned

TCRM10 -

96

48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)

49 How does is works (4)

50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management

51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM

TCRM10 -

108

52 What is the Process of TPM

53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of

each

TCRM10 -

109

54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -

118

55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -

119

56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -

120

57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)

58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding

E Service (7) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

133

59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -

135

60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may

perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

140

61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -

141

62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)

63 What is PRM

64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to

achieve it efficient How

TCRM10 -

150

65 What is eh concept of the PCM

66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)

TCRM10 -

151

67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management

68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each

(6)

TCRM10 -

153

69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

157

70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158

72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -

170

73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the

Business Partner integrate

TCRM10 -

171

74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -

178

75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -

179

76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose

77 Which processes it follows

78 What are its attributes (3)

TCRM10 -

188

79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -

189

80 What is the purpose of the activity Management

81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System

TCRM10 -

193

82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -

194

83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -

195

84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -

199

85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -

200

86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales

Methodology (4)

TCRM10 -

201

87 What are the initials PPM

88 What is the purpose of the tool

89 Who uses it and how (2)

TCRM10 -

201

90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -

207

91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -

208

92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to

maintain contracts

93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)

94 What is the relation between the contract and the order

TCRM10 -

218

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order

96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -

219

97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts

regarding work processes and updates (4)

TCRM10 -

220

98 What is the ICM What is his use

99 What are its business goals (3)

100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results

TCRM10 -

225

101 What are the main roles in an IC

102 What is the scratch pad

103 What is the Account info

104 What is the Alert

105 What is the Communication Information

106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers

107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system

TCRM10 -

231

108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM

109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)

TCRM10 -

232

110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be

integrated

TCRM10 -

233

111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -

234

112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the

knowledge search What are the results

TCRM10 -

235

113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)

114 What is an Interactive scripting

115 What is ERMS

116 What is the IDI

TCRM10 -

247

117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how

(3)

118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)

TCRM10 -

248

119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI

planned

120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting

121 What other IDI tools are there

TCRM10 -

249

122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of

creating a call list

TCRM10 -

250

123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)

124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)

TCRM10 -

251

125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -

257

126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 18: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

(8) 37

13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture

14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)

TCRM10 -

44

15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of

updates tare there

16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which

component do it What is the purpose of the verification

TCRM10 -

46

17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange

18 What is the role of the adapters

19 What is the CRM Adapter

20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas

TCRM10 -

47

21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)

22 What are the different components on the Application (3)

23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each

TCRM10 -

52

24 What is the purpose of the IC

25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)

TCRM10 -

53

26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile

users (3)

TCRM10 -

54

27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -

55

28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -

61

29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -

63

30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the

integration

31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing

TCRM10 -

80

32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan

33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)

34 What are the sub elements of a MP

35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)

36 What are the campaign characters (4)

37 What are the sub elements of a campaign

TCRM10 -

81

38 What is the meaning of segmentation

39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data

resources for each

40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers

41 What is the use of the attribute list

TCRM10 -

86

42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -

88

43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

group method

44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom

89

45 What is the activity TCRM10 -

95

46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign

47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned

TCRM10 -

96

48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)

49 How does is works (4)

50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management

51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM

TCRM10 -

108

52 What is the Process of TPM

53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of

each

TCRM10 -

109

54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -

118

55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -

119

56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -

120

57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)

58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding

E Service (7) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

133

59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -

135

60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may

perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

140

61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -

141

62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)

63 What is PRM

64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to

achieve it efficient How

TCRM10 -

150

65 What is eh concept of the PCM

66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)

TCRM10 -

151

67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management

68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each

(6)

TCRM10 -

153

69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

157

70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158

72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -

170

73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the

Business Partner integrate

TCRM10 -

171

74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -

178

75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -

179

76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose

77 Which processes it follows

78 What are its attributes (3)

TCRM10 -

188

79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -

189

80 What is the purpose of the activity Management

81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System

TCRM10 -

193

82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -

194

83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -

195

84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -

199

85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -

200

86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales

Methodology (4)

TCRM10 -

201

87 What are the initials PPM

88 What is the purpose of the tool

89 Who uses it and how (2)

TCRM10 -

201

90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -

207

91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -

208

92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to

maintain contracts

93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)

94 What is the relation between the contract and the order

TCRM10 -

218

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order

96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -

219

97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts

regarding work processes and updates (4)

TCRM10 -

220

98 What is the ICM What is his use

99 What are its business goals (3)

100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results

TCRM10 -

225

101 What are the main roles in an IC

102 What is the scratch pad

103 What is the Account info

104 What is the Alert

105 What is the Communication Information

106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers

107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system

TCRM10 -

231

108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM

109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)

TCRM10 -

232

110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be

integrated

TCRM10 -

233

111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -

234

112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the

knowledge search What are the results

TCRM10 -

235

113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)

114 What is an Interactive scripting

115 What is ERMS

116 What is the IDI

TCRM10 -

247

117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how

(3)

118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)

TCRM10 -

248

119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI

planned

120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting

121 What other IDI tools are there

TCRM10 -

249

122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of

creating a call list

TCRM10 -

250

123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)

124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)

TCRM10 -

251

125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -

257

126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 19: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

group method

44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom

89

45 What is the activity TCRM10 -

95

46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign

47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned

TCRM10 -

96

48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)

49 How does is works (4)

50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management

51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM

TCRM10 -

108

52 What is the Process of TPM

53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of

each

TCRM10 -

109

54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -

118

55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -

119

56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -

120

57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)

58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding

E Service (7) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

133

59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -

135

60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may

perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each

TCRM10 -

140

61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -

141

62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)

63 What is PRM

64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to

achieve it efficient How

TCRM10 -

150

65 What is eh concept of the PCM

66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)

TCRM10 -

151

67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management

68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each

(6)

TCRM10 -

153

69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

157

70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158

72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -

170

73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the

Business Partner integrate

TCRM10 -

171

74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -

178

75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -

179

76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose

77 Which processes it follows

78 What are its attributes (3)

TCRM10 -

188

79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -

189

80 What is the purpose of the activity Management

81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System

TCRM10 -

193

82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -

194

83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -

195

84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -

199

85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -

200

86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales

Methodology (4)

TCRM10 -

201

87 What are the initials PPM

88 What is the purpose of the tool

89 Who uses it and how (2)

TCRM10 -

201

90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -

207

91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -

208

92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to

maintain contracts

93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)

94 What is the relation between the contract and the order

TCRM10 -

218

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order

96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -

219

97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts

regarding work processes and updates (4)

TCRM10 -

220

98 What is the ICM What is his use

99 What are its business goals (3)

100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results

TCRM10 -

225

101 What are the main roles in an IC

102 What is the scratch pad

103 What is the Account info

104 What is the Alert

105 What is the Communication Information

106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers

107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system

TCRM10 -

231

108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM

109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)

TCRM10 -

232

110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be

integrated

TCRM10 -

233

111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -

234

112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the

knowledge search What are the results

TCRM10 -

235

113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)

114 What is an Interactive scripting

115 What is ERMS

116 What is the IDI

TCRM10 -

247

117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how

(3)

118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)

TCRM10 -

248

119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI

planned

120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting

121 What other IDI tools are there

TCRM10 -

249

122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of

creating a call list

TCRM10 -

250

123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)

124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)

TCRM10 -

251

125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -

257

126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 20: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158

72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -

170

73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the

Business Partner integrate

TCRM10 -

171

74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -

178

75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -

179

76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose

77 Which processes it follows

78 What are its attributes (3)

TCRM10 -

188

79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -

189

80 What is the purpose of the activity Management

81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System

TCRM10 -

193

82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -

194

83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -

195

84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -

199

85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -

200

86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales

Methodology (4)

TCRM10 -

201

87 What are the initials PPM

88 What is the purpose of the tool

89 Who uses it and how (2)

TCRM10 -

201

90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -

207

91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -

208

92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to

maintain contracts

93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)

94 What is the relation between the contract and the order

TCRM10 -

218

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order

96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -

219

97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts

regarding work processes and updates (4)

TCRM10 -

220

98 What is the ICM What is his use

99 What are its business goals (3)

100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results

TCRM10 -

225

101 What are the main roles in an IC

102 What is the scratch pad

103 What is the Account info

104 What is the Alert

105 What is the Communication Information

106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers

107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system

TCRM10 -

231

108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM

109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)

TCRM10 -

232

110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be

integrated

TCRM10 -

233

111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -

234

112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the

knowledge search What are the results

TCRM10 -

235

113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)

114 What is an Interactive scripting

115 What is ERMS

116 What is the IDI

TCRM10 -

247

117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how

(3)

118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)

TCRM10 -

248

119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI

planned

120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting

121 What other IDI tools are there

TCRM10 -

249

122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of

creating a call list

TCRM10 -

250

123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)

124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)

TCRM10 -

251

125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -

257

126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 21: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order

96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -

219

97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts

regarding work processes and updates (4)

TCRM10 -

220

98 What is the ICM What is his use

99 What are its business goals (3)

100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results

TCRM10 -

225

101 What are the main roles in an IC

102 What is the scratch pad

103 What is the Account info

104 What is the Alert

105 What is the Communication Information

106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers

107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system

TCRM10 -

231

108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM

109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)

TCRM10 -

232

110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be

integrated

TCRM10 -

233

111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -

234

112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the

knowledge search What are the results

TCRM10 -

235

113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)

114 What is an Interactive scripting

115 What is ERMS

116 What is the IDI

TCRM10 -

247

117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how

(3)

118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)

TCRM10 -

248

119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI

planned

120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting

121 What other IDI tools are there

TCRM10 -

249

122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of

creating a call list

TCRM10 -

250

123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)

124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)

TCRM10 -

251

125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -

257

126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 22: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)

128 What are the installed base purposes (4)

129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system

130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important

258

131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -

258

132 What is a service contract

133 What are the characters of the service contract

134 What is required to be on the service confirmation

135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service

agreement Where is it defined

136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each

phase

137 What kind of service Management are there (3)

138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -

263

139 What determines the profile of a service contract

140 What is determined under parts (3)

141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract

TCRM10 -

264

142 What is the service planner

143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)

144 What are the uses of the planner (2)

TCRM10 -

265

145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application

146 What service elements does it process (4)

TCRM10 -

271

147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -

274

148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)

149 What is the process of the returns and complaints

150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return

151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created

TCRM10 -

285

152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds

153 What is the warranty check

154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used

TCRM10 -

286

155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)

156 In term of system objects what is the InsB

157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each

158 Which main system functions are using the InsB

159 What are the attributes of an InsB

160 What is the purpose of the in house repair

161 What is the suggested process of in house repair

162 Which other modules are connected to this process

163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair

164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair

165 What is the document logic of an in house repair

TCRM10 -

290

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 23: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair

167 What are the main functions of the in house repair

168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application

169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA

170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)

171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)

TCRM10 -

295

172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)

173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)

174 What is a subscription

TCRM10 -

303

175 What is the MAS

176 What is the MAR

TCRM10 -

304

177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -

305

178 On which environment is the mobile client active

179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the

CRM server and the mobile client

180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in

the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place

TCRM10 -

307

181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role

What does it enables

182 What does it include (3)

183 Which technologies run it

TCRM10 -

315

184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics

185 What are its goals (5)

186 What are the business uses (4)

TCRM10 -

324

187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)

188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)

189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)

190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)

TCRM10 -

328

191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -

335

192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed

193 What is the process of defining a report (6)

TCRM10 -

342

194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger

195 What are its goals What is the result

196 What is the scope of the SM

TCRM10 -

353

197 What is a project preparation

198 What is Business Blue Prints

199 Realization

200 Final Preparation

201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)

202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use

203 Service Level reporting

TCRM10 -

354

204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 24: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

205 Support Desk

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 25: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

SAP CR 100

Page Theme

21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI

33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP

42 Customizing Account classification

44 Customizing Account life cycle

45 Determination of the life cycle flow

Definition of exclusion Groups

47 Customizing mini Templates

52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM

53 BP customization

57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance

61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address

63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area

69 Adding and Customizing Address Type

71 Creation of Mini Templates

90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management

92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination

96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM

99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model

103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data

determinaton

113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM

117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data

118 Define Service and Warranty Products

121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient

122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System

125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 26: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master

141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client

143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a

Product + adding field to the product Master data

159 Copt Control Customizing

160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile

163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types

Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence

165 Customizing Date Profile

Customizing Date Types

166 Customizing Status Profile for Users

168 Customizing Incompleteness Check

169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check

170 Activating Change History

173 Exercises for Transaction processing

177 Exercises for Copying Control

179 Exercises for Text Determination

181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check

183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios

219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types

221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions

224 Customizing Activity Analysis

227 Exercises for customizing management Activity

247 Customizing Partner Function

248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure

249 Customizing Access Sequence

251 Exercises for Partner Processing

278 Customizing Actions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 27: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

Definition of Conditions

285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing

307 Customizing Pricing Procedure

308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure

309 Customizing and defining Condition Types

310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access

311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables

List of Condition Tables on the System

314 General Conditions Maintenance

315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)

321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing

326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure

346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document

350 Customizing Billing Plans

351 Customizing Billing activities

357 Billing configuration

359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents

365 Creating a billing Document

380 Starting initial Load

Access to the Administration Console

384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load

386 Access to Bdoc Modeler

391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers

393 Exercises in Middle Ware

410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI

413 Customizing of navigation and business roles

416 Personalize setting the Web client UI

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 28: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

417 Configuring UI components

419 Role Configuration

420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations

TCR_10

Page Theme

68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI

82 Creation of Marketing Plan

98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form

486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing

490 Maintain set types and attributes

491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone

Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP

TCR_20

Page Theme

224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy

352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console

583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI

642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User

654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile

662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile

680 Definition of Transaction Launcher

739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)

754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks

768 Configuration of the fact sheet

793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing

Page 29: Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions

SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation

29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved

842 Component Enhancement Customizing